Motion Physics Module 4

JEE Class Companion
Physics
For JEE Main and Advanced
Module-4
Chapter 1 Simple Harmonic Motion
Chapter 2 Waves
Chapter 3 Sound Wave

Contents
Chapter 1 - Simple Harmonic Motion 1.1 Section H - Combination of two or more SHM
Section A – Equation of SHM, Velocity and Vector Method of Combining Two or More
Acceleration is SHM, Energy of Simple Harmonic Motions 1.24
SHM Mind Map 1.27
Periodic Motion 1.1
Exercise 1.28
Oscillatory Motion 1.1
Answer Key 1.52
Types of SHM 1.1
Analysis of Motion in Linear SHM 1.2
Characteristics of SHM 1.2
Chapter 2 - Waves 2.1
Equation of simple Harmonic Motion 1.3 Section A - Euqation of Wave, Particle Velocity
Velocity 1.4 and Acceleration
Acceleration 1.4 Waves 2.1

Graphical Representation of Displacement, Waves classification 2.1
Velocity & Acceleration in SHM 1.5 Mechanical waves 2.1
SHM as a Projection of uniform Non Mechanical waves 2.1
circular Motion 1.7 Transverse waves 2.1
Energy of SHM 1.10 Longitudinal waves 2.2
Kinetic Energy (KE) 1.10 Mathematical description of waves 2.2
Potential Energy (PE) 1.11 Describing Waves 2.3
Initial Phase 2.3
Section B – Time period and Angular Particle velocity and acceleration 2.5
frequency in SHM
Different forms of wave function 2.5
Method to determine time period and angular THE LINEAR WAVE EQUATION 2.6
frequency in simple Harmonic Motion 1.12
Section B – Speed of transverse wave on
Section C - Two block system string, energy in waves
Two Block Systems 1.16 Speed of a transverse Wave on a String 2.9
Energy calculation in waves 2.11
Section D - Combination of springs Kinetic energy per unit length 2.11
Series Combination 1.17 Rate of transmission of kinetic energy 2.11
Parallel combination 1.18 Elastic potential energy 2.11
Energy Method 1.19 Mechanical energy per unit length 2.12
Average power transmitted 2.12
Section E - Angular SHM
Energy density 2.13
Angular S.H.M. 1.20
Intensity 2.13
Section F - Simple Pendulum Phase difference between two particles
Simple Pendulum 1.20 in the same wave 2.13
Time period of Simple Pendulum in
accelerating Reference Frame 1.21 Section C - Super position principle
interference of waves
Principle of Superposition 2.13
Section G - Compound pendulum / physical
Applications of Principle of Superposition
pendulum, Torsional pendulum of Waves 2.14
Compound Pendulum / Physical Pendulum 1.22 Interference of Waves 2.14
TORSIONAL PENDULUM 1.23 Analytical Treatment of Interference
of Waves 2.16
Section D - Reflection and transmission Effect of Temperature on Velocity of Sound 3.6
between 2 string Effect of Pressure on Velocity of Sound 3.6
Reflection and Transmission in waves 2.18 Effect of Humidity on Velocity of Sound 3.6
Reflection and Transmission between Effect of Wind on Velocity of Sound 3.7
two string 2.19 Appearance of sound to human ear 3.7
Section E - Equation of standing wave Section B - Interference of waves, Reflection

(Stationary waves) and refraction
Standing Waves 2.20 Analytical Treatment of Interference of Waves 3.8
Different Equation for a Stationary Wave 2.21
Energy of standing wave in one loop 2.23 Section C - Standing waves (organ pipes),
Resonance tube, Quink's tube, Kundt's tube
Section F - Stationary waves in strings, Longitudinal standing waves 3.9
vibration in string wave, sono Reflection of sound Waves 3.9
meter wire Waves in a Vibrating air Column 3.10
STATIONARY WAVES IN STRINGS 2.23 Vibration of Air in a Closed Organ Pipe 3.10
When both end of string is fixed 2.23 Vibration of Air in Open Organ Pipe 3.11
When one end of the string is fixed and End correction 3.11
other is free 2.24 Resonance Tube 3.12
Travelling Waves 2.25 Quink's Tube 3.13
Stationary Waves 2.25 Vibrations of Clamped Rod 3.16
Natural Oscillation of Organ Pipes 3.17
Exercise 2.26 Kundt's Tube 3.17
Answer Key 2.43
Section D - Beat's, Doppler's effect
Chapter 3 - Sound Waves 3.1 (Sound & light)
Beats 3.18
Section A - Equation of pressure wave, Doppler's Effect 3.19
Velocity, Newton's and laplace Stationary Source and Stationary Observer 3.19
formula, Loudness and intensity, Stationary Source and Moving Observer 3.20
Energy in sound waves Moving Source and Stationary Observer 3.20
Sound Waves 3.1 Moving Source and Moving Observer 3.21
PROPAGATION OF SOUND WAVES 3.1 Doppler Effect in Reflected Sound 3.21
Compression Waves 3.2 Doppler's Effect for Accelerated Motion 3.22
Velocity and Acceleration of particle 3.3 Doppler's Effect when Source and
Velocity of Sound / Longitudinal Waves Observer are not in Same Line of Motion 3.22
in Solids 3.4
Newton's Formula for velocity Exercise 3.23
of Sound in Gases 3.5 Answer Key 3.42
Laplace Correction 3.5
SYLLABUS
• Simple Harmonic Motion
Linear and angular simple harmonic motions.
• WAVES & SOUND WAVE

Wave motion (plane waves only), longitudinal and transverse waves, Superposition of waves;
progressive and stationary waves.
Vibration of strings and air columns. Resonance; Beats; Speed of sound in gases Doppler effect
(in sound). Vibration of strings and air columns. Resonance; Beats; Speed of sound in gases;
Doppler effect (in sound).
Simple Harmonic Motion 1.1
Simple Harmonic Motion

CHAPTER
1
Section A – Equation of SHM, Velocity and (i) If n is an even interger (0, 2, 4......... etc)n force is
Acceleration is SHM, Energy of always along negative x-axis whether x is positive
SHM or negative Hence, the motion of the particle is not
1. PERIODIC MOTION : oscillatory. If the particle is released from any
When a body or a moving particle repeats its motion position on the x-axis (except x = 0) a force in – ve
along a definite path after regular intervals of time direction of x-axis acts on it and it moves
its motion is said to be Periodic Motion and interval rectilinearly along – ve x axis.
of time is called time period (T). The path of periodic (ii) If n is an odd integer (1, 3, 5 ........... etc), force is
motion may be linear, circular, elliptical or any other along – ve x-axis for x > 0 and along +ve x-axis for
curve. For example rotation of earth around the sun.
x < 0 and zero for x = 0. Thus the particle will
oscillate about stable equillibrium position x = 0. The
2. OSCILLATORY MOTION : force in this case is called the restoring force.
To and fro type of motion is called Oscillatory If n = 1 i.e., F = – kx the motion is said to be SHM
Motion. A particle has oscillatory motion when it (Simple Harmonic Motion)
moves about stable equilibrium position. It need not
If the restoring force / torque acting on the body in
be periodic and need not have fixed extreme
oscillatory motion is directly proportional to the
positions.
displacement of body / particle w.r.t. mean position
The oscillatory motions in which energy is conserved
and is always directed towards equillibrium position
are also periodic.For example motion of pendulum
then the motion is called Simple Harmonic motion.
of a wall clock.
It is the simplest form of oscillatory motion.
The force / torque (directed towards equillibrium
point) acting in oscillatory motion is called restoring
force/torque Damped Oscillations are those in 3. TYPES OF SHM :
which energy consumed due to some resistive forces (a) Linear SHM : When a particle moves to
and hence total mechanical energy decreases and
and fro about an equilibrium point, along a straight
after some time oscillation will stop.
line here A and B are extreme positions and M is
mean position so AM = MB = Amplitude.
Oscillatory Equation : Consider a particle
free to move on x-axis is being acted upon by a M
A B
force given by
F = – kxn (b) Angular SHM : When body/particle is
Above equation is called oscillatory equation. Here free to rotate about a given axis and executing
k is a positive constant and x is the displacement angular oscillations.
from mean position
Now following cases are possible depending on the
value of n.
Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.2 Theory and Exercise Book
4. ANALYSIS OF MOTION IN LINEAR SHM : towards A is decreasing in magnitude while its speed
When the particle is moved away from the mean increases and finally it comes to A with same speed
position or equillibrium position and released, a force v = v0.
(–kx) comes into play to pull it back towards mean
(3) Motion of a particle from A to C :
position. By the time it gets at mean position it has
picked up some kinetic energy and so it overshoots, The motion of a particle from A to C is qualitatively
stopping some where on the other side and it is again same as motion of a particle from A to B.
pulled back towards the mean position.
(4) Motion of a particle from C to A :
It is necessary to study the change in speed and
It is qualitatively same as motion of a particle from
acceleration of particle during SHM. Let us consider
B to A.
a particle whose position is x = 0 at t = 0 and v = v0.
Then we divide the motion of particle in one time Summary :
period in four parts.
Velocity Acceleration
Mean Motion
extreme Extreme (Direction/ (Direction/
position Position position from
Magnitude) Magnitude)
A  B V   a  
v=v0
A B  A V   a  
B
v=0 v=0 A  C V   a  
C C  A V   a  
5. CHARACTERISTICS OF SHM :
Amplitude
x=0 t=0 (1) Mean Position : It is the position where net
x
force on the particle is zero.
(A) from A to B (B) from B to A
(2) Extreme Point : Point where speed of the
(C) from A to C (D) from C to A particle is zero.
(3) Displacement : It is defined as the distance
Note
of the particle from the mean position at that instant.
(4) Amplitude : It is the maximum value of
displacement of the particle from its mean position.
(1) Motion of a particle from A to B :
Extreme position – Mean position = Amplitude.
Initially the particle is at A (mean position) and is
moving towards +ve x direction with speed v0. As It depends upon the energy of the system.
the particle is moving towards B, force acting on it (5) Frequency : The frequency of SHM is equal
towards A is increasing. Consequently its to the number of complete oscillations per unit time.
acceleration towards A is increasing in magnitude
1 
while its speed decreases and finally it comes to f  sec –1 or Hz.
T 2
rest momentarily at B.
(6) Time Period : Smallest time interval after which
the oscillatory motion gets repeated is called time
(2) Motion of a particle from B to A :
period.
Now the particle starts moving towards A with initial
2
speed v = 0. As the particle is moving towards A, T=

force is acting on it towards A and decreasing as it
approaches A. Consequently its acceleration
EXAMPLE 1 x=2 ;F=3 N
Describe the motion of a particle acted upon by a (away from M.P.)

force. Particle doesn't perform S.H.M.
(A) F = 3x + 3 (B) F = – 3x – 3
(C) F = – 3x + 3 (D) F = 3x – 3 6. EQUATION OF SIMPLE HARMONIC
Sol. (a) Given F = 3x + 3 ...(i) MOTION :
We find the mean position at which net force on The necessary and sufficient condition for SHM is
the particle is zero. F = – kx
 3x + 3 = 0 we can write above equation in the following way:
 x=–1 ma = – kx
If we put x = 0 in eq. (i) then
d 2x
m  –kx
dt 2
M.P.
d2 x k
x = –1  x  0 ...(1)
dt 2 m
Equation (1) is Double Differential Equation of
F = 3N (away from M.P.) ...(a) SHM.
Now put x = –2 in eq. (i)
d2x
F=– 3N (away from M.P.) ...(b) Now  2 x  0
dt 2
From (a) and (b) we conclude that particle doesn't
perform S.H.M. It's solution is x = A sin(t  )
(b) Given F = – 3x – 3 ...(i)
k
at M.P. F = 0 where  = angular frequency =
m
 x = –1
x = displacement from mean position
Now put x = 0 in eq. (i)
k = SHM constant.
 F = – 3N (towards M.P.)
The equality (t + ) is called the phase angle or
If x = – 2 ; F = 3N (towards M.P.)
simply the phase of the SHM and  is the initial
We conclude from the above calculation that in phase i.e., the phase at t = 0 and depends on initial
every case (whether the particle is left from M.P. position and direction of velocity at t = 0.
or right from M.P.) force acts towards M.P. so the
To understand the role of  in SHM, we take two
particle performs S.H.M.
particles performing SHM in the following condition:
(c) Given F = – 3x + 3
when F=0
v0 A
x = 1 (M.P.) x
–A M.P.
Now put x = 0
Then F = 3N (towards M.P.)
figure I
If x = 2 F = – 3 (towards M.P.)
i.e. particle performs S.H.M.
(D) Given F = 3x – 3
M.P. x
Mean position at x = 1. –A A
When x = 0 ; F = – 3N
(away from M.P.) figure II
Suppose we choose t = 0 at an instant when the Sol. General equation of SHM can be written as
particle is passing through its mean position x = A sin (t + )
towards right (i.e.positive direction) as shown in At t = 0, x = A/2
figure Ist then
In figure I at t = 0 x=0 A
 = A sin 
i.e., x = A sin t 2
 The particle is at its mean position.   = 30° , 150°
In figure II at t=0 x = A and Also at t = 0, v = – ve
the particle is moving towards the mean position. A cos  = – ve   = 150°
i.e., x = A sin (t + /2)
Here /2 is the only phase possible.
7. VELOCITY :
It is the rate of change of particle displacement with
EXAMPLE 2 respect to time at that instant.
A particle starts from mean position and moves Let the displacement from mean position is given
towards positive extreme as shown below. Find the
by x = A sin (t + )
equation of the SHM. Amplitude of SHM is A.
t=0 dx
velocity v   A cos(t  )
–A O A dt
Sol. General equation of SHM can be written as x = A v = A cos (t + )
sin (t + )
v =  A2 – x2
At t = 0, x = 0
 0 = A sin  At mean position (x = 0), velocity is maximum.
  = 0,    [0, 2) Vmax =  A
Also; at t = 0, v = + ve At extreme position (x = A), velocity is minimum.
 A  cos  = + ve or, = 0 vmin = zero.
Hence, if the particle is at mean position at t = 0
and is moving towards +ve extreme, then the
7.1 Gra ph o f Ve locity (v) V /S
equation of SHM is given by x = A sin t.
Displacement (x) :
Similarly
for particle moving towards –ve extreme then v   A2 – x2 Velocity (v)
t=0
v 2  2 (A 2 – x 2 ) A
–A +A
= v 2  2 x 2  2 A 2
 equation of SHM is x = A sin (t + )
or, x = – A sin t v2 x2 –A A x
 1
2 A 2 A 2
EXAMPLE 3 Graph would be a half ellipse.

Write the equation of SHM for the situation shown
below : 8. ACCELERATION :
t=0 It is the rate of change of particle's velocity w.r.t.
–A O A/2 A time at that instant.
dv d time, t 0 T/4 T/2 3T/4 T

Acceleration, a   [A cos( t  )]
dt dt
displacement, x 0 A 0 –A 0
a = – 2A sin (t + )
a = – 2 x Velocity, v A 0 A  0 A
acceleration, a 0 2 A 0 2A 0
Note
x T/4 T/2 3T/4 T 5T/4 3T/2
A
amin = zero
At extreme position (x = A), acceleration is maximum. t
|amax | = 2A –A
v
A
8.1 Gra ph o f Ac cele ration (A) v/s t
Displacement (x): –A
a
a 2 A
2 A t
A – 2 A
x
a = – 2x –A
1. All the three quantities displacement, velocity and
– 2 A
acceleration vary harmonically with time, having
same period.
2. The maximum velocity is  times the amplitude
(Vmax = A).
9. GRAPHICAL REPRESENTATION
3. The acceleration is 2 times the displacement
OF DISPLACEMENT, VELOCITY &
amplitude (amax = 2A).
ACCELERATION IN SHM:
4. In SHM, the velocity is ahead of displacement by
Displacement, x = A sin t

 a phase angle of .
Velocity, v = A  cos t = A  sin (t  ) 2
2
5. In SHM, the acceleration is ahead of velocity by
or v A –x 2 2

a phase angle of .
Acceleration, 2 2
a = –  A sin t =  A sin (t + ) 2
or a = – 2 x
EXAMPLE 4
Note The equation of particle executing simple harmonic
• v   A2  x2  
motion is x  (5m) sin ( s –1 )t  . Write down
 3 
the amplitude, time period and maximum speed. Also
These relations are true for any equation of x. find the velocity at t = 1 s.
Sol. Comparing with equation x = A sin (t + ), we see

that the amplitude = 5m,
Note
2 2
and time period =    s –1  2s
The maximum speed = A  = 5 m ×  s–1 = 5  m/s
dx
The veloity at time t  = A  cos (t + )
dt
At t = 1 s, EXAMPLE 6
A particle of mass 2 kg is moving on a straight line
  5 under the action force F = (8 – 2x) N. It is released
v = (5 m) ( s–1) cos      – m / s
 3 2
at rest from x = 6m.
EXAMPLE 5 (A) Is the particle moving simple harmonically?
A particle executing simple harmonic motion has (B) Find the equilibrium position of the particle.
angular frequency 6.28 s–1 and amplitude 10 cm.
(C) Write the equation of motion of the particle.
Find (a) the time period, (b) the maximum speed,
(c) the maximum acceleration, (d) the speed when (D) Find the time period of SHM.
the displacement is 6 cm from the mean position, Sol. F = 8 – 2x or F = –2(x – 4)
(e) the speed at t = 1/6 s assuming that the motion
for equilibrium position F = 0
starts from rest at t = 0.
 x = 4m is equilibrium position.
2 2
Sol. (a) Time period =  s = 1 s. Hence the motion of particle is SHM with force
 6.28
constant 2 and equilibrium position x =4.
(b) Maximum speed = A = (0.1m) (6.28 s–1)
(a) Yes, motion is SHM.
(c) Maximum acceleration = A2
= (0.1m) (6.28 s–1)2 = 4 m/s2 (b) Equilibrium position is x = 4m.
2 2
(c) At x = 6 m, particle at rest i.e. it is one of the
(d) v   A – x
extreme position. Hence amplitude is A = 2 m and
initially particle at the extreme position.
= (6.28 s–1) (10cm)2 – (6cm)2 = 50.2 cm/s.
 Equation of SHM can be written as
(e) At t = 0, the velocity is zero i.e., the particle is at
an extreme. The equation for displacement may be x – 4 = 2 cos t,
written as
k 2
x = A cos t. where     1 (sec)–1
m 2
The velocity is v = – A  sin t.
i.e. x = 4 + 2 cos t
1  6.28 
At t  s , v = – (0.1 m) (6.28 s ) sin 
–1

6  6  2
(d) Time period, T   2 sec.


= (–0.628 m/s) sin
3
= – 54.4 cm/s. (towards mean position)
10. S HM AS A P RO JECTIO N O F (4) Horizontal component of velocity of particle gives

UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION. you the velocity of particle performing S.H.M. for
example
Consider a particle Q, moving on a circle of radius
A with constant angular velocity . The projection
of Q on a diameter BC is P. It is clear from the 0)
 t=
(a
t t)
figure that as Q moves around the circle the t t=
Q 0 Q t(a
projection P excecutes a simple harmonic motion
 v(t)
on the x-axis between B and C. The angle that the t (t  )
radius OQ makes with the +ve vertical in clockwise v  A
direction in at t = 0 is equal to phase constant ().
Let the radius OQ0 makes an angle t with the
OQt at time t. Then
–A A
x(t) = A sin (t + )
from figure
)
 t =0 v(t) = A  cos (t + )
0
(at t) (5) Component of acceleration of particle in horizontal
=
A Q at t direction is equal to the acceleration of particle
 (t
t Q performing S.H.M. The acceleration of a particle
B in uniform circular motion is only centripetal and
O P0 Pt C
x(t) has a magnitude a = 2 A.
From figure
Q0
t  
a(t) Qt  
  – (t  )
t 2 
–A (0,0) +A  A2
M.P.
x(t)
In the above discussion the foot of projection is

x-axis so it is called horizontal phasor. Similarly the a(t) = – 2A sin (t + )
foot of perpendicular on y axis will also executes
SHM of amplitude A and angular frequency  [y(t)
= Acos t]. This is called vertical phasor. The phaser EXAMPLE 7
of the two SHM differ by /2. A particle starts from A/2 and moves towards
Problem solving strategy in horizontal phasor: positive extreme as shown below. Find the equation
(1) First assume circle of radius equal to amplitude of of the SHM. Given amplitude of SHM is A.
S.H.M. O t=0
(2) Assume a particle rotating in a circular path moving –A A/2 +A
with constant  same as that of S.H.M in clockwise
Sol. We will solve the above problem with the help of
direction.
horizontal phasor.
(3) Angle made by the particle at t = 0 with the upper
vertical is equal to phase constant.
Step 1. Draw a perpendicular line in upward direction from (a) Find the equation of the SHM.
(b) Find the time taken by the particle to go directly
from its initial position to negative extreme.
T (c) Find the time taken by the particle to reach at
R
mean position.
A v(t)
Sol. Figure shows the solution of the problem with the
O' A/2 Q help of phasor
Horizontal component of velocity at Q gives the
S
v(t)
required direction of velocity at t = 0.
O P
–A (0,0) A/2 A
M.P.(at t=0) 3 / 2A 3 
In  OSQ cos     
A 2 6
point P on the circle which cuts it at point R & S

R
Step 2. Horizontal compoment of v(t) at R gives the direction 


P to A while at S gives P to O. So at t = 0 particle is S ( 3 / 2) A
O 
at R 
A
Step 3. In  O'RQ
Q
A/2
cos  =  60   = 30°
A
–A – 3 / 2 A (0,0) A
T R
3  8 4 
Now  –  
2 6 6 3
A
 So equation of SHM is

O'
Q  4 
A/2 x  A sin  t  
 3 
So equation of the SHM (b) Now to reach the particle at left extreme point
is x = A sin (t + 30°) it will travel angle  along the circle. So time taken.
  T
EXAMPLE 8 t   t sec
 6 12
– 3 (c) To reach the particle at mean position it will

A particle starts from point x  A and move
2   2
travel an angle  =  
towards negative extreme as shown 2 6 3
t=0  T
O  sec
So, time taken =
–A – 3 +A  3
A
2
EXAMPLE 9 When they meet angular displacement of P is

Two particles undergoes SHM along parallel lines  = /2 + /4 = 3/4
with the same time period (T) and equal amplitudes. 3
At a particular instant, one particle is at its extreme So they will meet after time t 
4
position while the other is at its mean position. They
move in the same direction. They will cross each 3 3T
t T  sec
other after a further time. 4  2 8
B O A
EXAMPLE 10
B’ O’ A’
Two particles execute SHM of same amplitude of
(A) T/8 (B) 3T/8 20 cm with same period along the same line about
(C) T/6 (D) 4T/3 the same equilibrium position. If phase difference
Sol. This problem is easy to solve with the help of phasor is /3 then find out the maximum distance between
diagram. these two.
First we draw the initial position of both the particle Sol. Let us assume that one particle starts from mean
on the phasor as shown in figure. position and another starts at a distance x having 
= /3. This condition is shown in figure.
P

Q
P
/3

Q  A 3
2
B' II I A' at t = 0
–A A
From above figure phase difference between both –A x A

the particles is /2.
40cm
They will cross each other when their projection from
the circle on the horizontal diameter meet at one point. Fig(i)
Let after time t both will reach at P'Q' point having
phase difference /2 as shown in figure.
v(t)
Q'
A/2 A/2
A
A A
45º  /3
P /6
Q P
45º 

v(t) A
Q
P' A
B' IR A' after t = t A
–A II O +A Fig ii
–A / 2
Above figure shows the situation of maximum
Both will meet at –A / 2 distance between them.
So maximum distance = A = 10 cm. (as 2A = 20 cm)
EXAMPLE 11
1
  tan 1  
Two particles execute SHM of same time period 2
but different amplitudes along the same line. One
So time taken by the particle to cross each other
starts from mean position having amplitude A and
other starts from extreme position having amplitude angle travelled by A /2  
t  t
2A. Find out the time when they both will meet?  
Sol. We solve the above problem with the help of phasor
diagram.
EXAMPLE 12
First we draw the initial position of both the particle
Two particles have time periods T and 5T/4. They
on the phasor.
start SHM at the same time from the mean postion.
After how many oscillations of the particle having
(t=0)
smaller time period, they will be again in the same
A 
phase ?
A Sol. They will be again at m.p. and moving in same
B (t=0)
2A direction when the particle having smaller time

period makes n 1 oscillations and the other one
makes n2 oscillations.
5T
 n1T =  n2
4
–A O A n1 5
  n1 = 5, n2 = 4
–2A O 2A n2 4
From figure phase difference between both the
particle is /2. 11. ENERGY OF SHM :
They will meet each other when their projection 11.1 Kinetic Energy (KE):
from the circle on the horizontal diameter meet at
one point. 1 2 1
K.E. = mv = mA22 cos2(t + )
2 2
1 k
A'(t) = m 2 (A2 – x2)  2 =
 2 m

A E 90   F
1
 K.E = K(A 2 – x 2 )
2A 2
B'(t)
1
K.Emax = KA2 (at x = 0)
2
P Q
–A A
–2A 2A K.Emin = 0 (at x = A) ;
P' Q'
1 2
Now from figure: KE = kA ;
0–T 4
EF = A cos  = 2A sin 
1
1 KE  kA 2
tan  = 0–A
3
2
Frequency of KE = 2 × (frequency of SHM)
11.2 Potential Energy (PE): 1 1

m2 A 2  kA 2  E
Simple harmonic motion is defined by the equation 2 2
F = – kx
Energy
2
The work done by the force F during a displacement U = Umaxcos t
(i) 2
from x to x + dx is K = Kmaxsin t
dW = Fdx = – kx dx O t
The work done in a displacement from x = 0 to x is
Potential, Kinetic and total energy plotted as function
x
1 of time
W  ( kx)dx   kx 2
 Energy
0
2
2 2
E = 1/2m A = Constant
1
U( x)  m 2 x 2
kx K(x) 2
(ii) U(x)
1
M.P. x K( x )  m 2 ( A 2  x 2 )
dx 2
x= –A x=0 x=A x
Let U(x) be the potential energy of the system when Potential, Kinetic and total energy are plotted as a
the displacement is x. As the change in potential function of displacement from the mean position.
energy corresponding to a conservative force is the
negative of the work done by that force. EXAMPLE 13
1 2 A particle of mass 0.50 kg executes a simple
U(x) – UM.P. = – W = kx harmonic motion under a force F = – (50 N/m)x. If
2
it crosses the centre of oscillation with a speed of
Let us choose the potential energy to be zero when 10 m/s, find the amplitude of the motion.
the particle is at the mean position oscillation x = 0. Sol. The kinetic energy of the particle when it is at the
1 2 centre of oscillation is
Then UM.P. = 0 and U(x)  kx 1
2 E  mv 2 =
 k = m2 2
1
1 (0.50kg) (10 m / s) 2 = 2.5 J.
 U(x)  m2 x 2 2
2 The potential energy is zero here. At the maximum
1 displacement x = A, the speed is zero and hence
U= m2 A 2 sin 2 ( t  ) the kinetic energy is zero. The potential energy here
2
1 2
But x = A sin (t + ) is kA . As there is no loss of energy,,
2
Kinetic energy of the particle at any instant is
1 2
kA  2.5J
1 1 2
K mv 2  mA 22 cos 2 (t  )
2 2 The force on the particle is given by
1 F = – (50 N/m) x.
 m2 (A 2  x 2 )
2 Thus the spring constant is k = 50 N/m.
So the total mechanical energy at time ‘t’ is Equation (i) gives
1 1 1
E=U+K E m2 A 2 (50 N / m)A 2  2.5J or, A= m.
2 2 10
Note
Note
Section B – Time period and Angular Step 4. Write down the net force on the particle in the
frequency in SHM displaced position.
From the above figure.
1. METHOD TO DETERMINE TIME
Fnet = mg – k (x + x0) ...(2)
P ERIO D AND ANGULAR
Step 5. Now try to reduce this net force equation in the
FR EQ UENCY IN S IMP LE
form of F = – kx (in linear S.H.M.) or  = – k (in
HARMONIC MOTION :
angular SHM) using mean position force relation in
To understand the steps which are usually followed step 2 or binomial theorem.
to find out the time period we will take one example.
from eq. (2) Fnet = mg – kx – kx0
Using eq (i) in above equation
EXAMPLE 14 Fnet = – kx ...(3)
A mass m is attached to the free Equation (3) shows that the net force acting towards
end of a massless spring of spring mean position and is proportional to x, but in this
constant k with its other end fixed S.H.M. constant KS.H.M. is replaced by spring
to a rigid support as shown in constant k. So
figure. Find out the time period of
the mass, if it is displaced slightly m m
T  2  2
by an amount x downward. m KS.H.M. k
Sol. The following steps are usually followed in this
method:
Step 1. Find the stable equillibrium position which is usually
known as the mean position. Net force or torque
on the particle at this position is zero. Potential
energy is minimum.
In our example initial position is the mean position.
n. k
m
m F0
x0

Natural Length M.P.
x0
kx0 x k(x+x0)  m
m m In above both cases T =  2 k 
Mean Position  
mg mg
Step 2. Write down the mean position force relation. In

above figure at mean position EXAMPLE 15
kx0 = mg ...(1) The string, the spring and

the pulley shown in figure
Step 3. Now displace the particle from its mean position by
are light.
a small displacement x (in linear SHM) or angle 
(in case of an angular SHM) as shown in figure. Find the time period of
k m
the mass m.
Sol. Let in equilibrium position of the block, extension in Case (a)

spring is x0.
 kx0 = mg ...(1)
n.
kx 0 x kx 0
x0  x0
2
x/2
Natural length T0
T0
x0 m
m T
k Equilibrium position x T
x mg m
m
mg
Now if we displace the block by x in the downward

When equillibrium When displaced block by 'x'
direction, net force on the block towards mean
position is In equilibrium T0 = mg and kx0 = 2T0
 kx0 = 2mg ...(1)
F = k (x + x0) – mg = kx using (1)
If the mass m moves down a distance x from its
Hence the net force is acting towards mean position equilibrium position then pulley will move down by
and is also proportional to x. So, the particle will
x kx
perform S.H.M. and its time period would be . So the extra force in spring will be . From
2 2
m figure
T  2
k k x
Fnet = mg – T = mg –  x0  
2 2
EXAMPLE 16
Figure shows a system consisting of a massless kx 0 kx
Fnet = mg – 
pulley, a spring of force constant k and ablock of 2 4
mass m. If the block is slightly displaced vertically from eq. (1)
down from its equillibrium position and then released,
–kx
find the period of its vertical oscillation in cases (a) Fnet = ...(3)
4
& (b).
Now compare eq. (3) with F = – KS.H.M x
K
then KS.H.M =
4
k
k
m 4m
 T  2  2
K S.H.M K
Case (b) :
m
m In this situation if the mass m moves down distance
(a) (b) x from its equilibrium position, then pulley will also
move by x and so the spring will stretch by 2x.
Sol. Let us assume that in equillibrium condition spring
is x0 elongate from its natural length
EXAMPLE 18
The system is in equilibrium and at rest. Now mass

x0 x0+2x
m1 is removed from m2. Find the time period and
2x amplitude of resultant motion. (Given : spring
T0
m constant is K.)
x T
mg m Sol. Initial extension in the spring
mg
(m1  m 2 )g
T mg x
At equilibrium kx0 = 0  k
2 2
When block is displaced
Fnet = mg – T = mg – 2k (x0 + 2x) = – 4 kx
Now F = – KSHM x
N.L m 2g
then KSHM = 4 K (m1  m 2 )g K
K E.P
m1g
m m1 K
So time period T  2  m2 m2
4k
Now, if we remove m1. equillibrium position (E.P.)

EXAMPLE 17
m 2g
The left block in figure collides inelastically with of m2 will be below natural length of spring.
K
the right block and sticks to it. Find the amplitude of
the resulting simple harmonic motion. At the initial position, since velocity is zero i.e.
v it is the extreme position.

m m k
m1g
Hence Amplitude =
K
Sol. The collision is for a small interval only, we can
apply the principal of conservation of momentum. m2
Time period = 2
K
v
The common velocity after the collision is . The
2
1
2 EXAMPLE 19
v 1
kinetic energy  (2m)    mv2. This is also
2 2 4 Block of mass m2 is in equilibrium and at rest. The
the total energy of vibration as the spring is mass m 1 moving with velocity u vertically
unstretched at this moment. If the amplitude is A, downwards collides with m2 and sticks to it. Find
the energy of oscillation.
1 2
the total energy can also be written as kA . Sol. At equilibrium position m2g = kx0
2
m2 g
1 2 1 m  x0 =
Thus, kA  mv 2 , giving A  v K
2 4 2k
EXAMPLE 20
A body of mass m falls from a height h on to the
pan of a spring balance. The masses of the pan and
N.L. spring are negligible. The spring constant of the
spring is k. Having stuck to the pan the body starts
x0 m1 u
performing harmonic oscillations in the vertical
v direction. Find the amplitude and energy of
m2 m1 +m2
oscillation.
After collision m2 sticks to m1. Sol. Suppose by falling down through a height h, the mass
 By momentum conservation. m compresses the spring balance by a length x.
m1u = (m1 + m2) v mg k

x= ,=
k m
m1u
v= m m
1 2
velocity at Q v= 2gh
Now both the blocks are executing S.H.M. which
can be interpreted as follows:  v =  A2  x 2
N.L. v
2
k  mg 
2gh  A2   
m.p. m  k 
m 2g m1g mg 2 kh
 A 1
K K k mg
Now, we know that v2 = 2(A2 – x2) ...(1)
Energy of oscillation
k
2
2 = m  m 1 2 1  mg   2kh  (mg) 2
1 2  kA  k    1  mg   mgh  2 k
2 2  k   
m1g
 x=
k
EXAMPLE 21
Put the values of v, 2 & x in eq. (1)
A body of mass 2m is
2 2 connected to another body
 m1u   k   2  m1g  
    A –    of mass m as shown in
 m1  m 2   m1  m 2    k  
figure. The mass 2m 2m
performs vertical S.H.M.
 m12 u 2   m1g 2  Then find out the
 kA =  m  m    k  
2
maximum amplitude of
 1 2    
2m such that mass m
1 2 doesn't
 Energy of oscillation = kA m
2 lift up from the ground.
Sol. In the given situation 2m mass is in equilibrium
1  m12 u 2   m12 g 2   condition.
= 2  m  m    k  
 1 2    Let assume spring is compressed x0 distance from
its natural length.
 kx0 = 2mg N.L. N.L of spring
2mg x0 2mg
 x0   x0
k 2m M.P. m k
kx0 m eq. position (M.P.)
The lower block will be lift Kx0
up, only in the case when
the spring force on it will
be greater than equal to
kx0
mg and in upward m
direction
2mg
 kx' = mg So maximum possible amplitude = x0 =
k
mg
 x'  A Note
k 2m
x'=mg/k
Above situation arises N.L.
kx'
2mg
when 2m block moves k
M.P.
upward mg/k from Section C – Two block system
natural kx'
1. Two Block Systems:
m
length as shown in figure
EXAMPLE 23
Block m doesn't lift up if the maximum amplitude Two blocks of mass m1 and m2 are connected with a
of the 2m block is spring of natural length l and spring constant k. The
system is lying on a smooth horizontal surface. Initially
2mg mg 3mg
   spring is compressed by x0 as shown in figure.
k k k
Show that the two blocks will perform SHM about
their equilibrium position. Also (a) find the time
EXAMPLE 22 period, (b) find amplitude of each block and (c)
length of spring as a function of time.
A block of mass m is at
  x0
rest on the another block
m k
of same mass as shown in m1 m2
m
figure. Lower block is
Sol. (a) Here both the blocks will be in equilibrium at
attached to the spring then
the same time when spring is in its natural length.
determine the maximum K
Let EP1 and EP2 be equilibrium positions of block
amplitude of motion so
A and B as shown in figure.
that both the block will
EP1 EP2
remain in contact. 
Sol. The blocks will remain in contact till the blocks do k

m1 m2
not go above the natural length of the spring, because
after this condition the deceleration of lower block Let at any time during oscillations, blocks are at a
becomes more then upper block due to spring force. distance of x1 and x2 from their equilibrium positions.
So they will get seprated.
EP1 EP2
x1 x2
k
m1 m2
As no external force is acting on the spring block (c) Let equilibrium position of 1st particle be origin, i.e.,
system x = 0.
 (m1 + m2)xcm = m1x1 – m2x2 = 0 x co-ordinate of particles can be written as
or m1x1 = m2x2 x1 = A1 cost and x2 =  – A2cost
For 1st particle, force equation can be written as Hence, length of spring can be written as :
d 2 x1 EP1 EP2
k(x1 + x2) = –m1
dt 2 
 m  m1 m2
or, k  x1  1 x1   –m1a1
 m 2 
x=0
k(m1  m 2 )
or, a1  – x1 length = x2 – x1
m1m 2
=  – (A1 + A2)cost
k(m1  m 2 )
 2 
m1m 2
Note
m1m 2 
Hence, T = 2   2
k(m1  m 2 ) K
m1m 2 Section D – Combination of springs

where   (m  m ) which is known as reduced
1 2 COMBINATION OF SPRINGS :
mass 1. Series Combination :
(b) Let the amplitude of blocks be A1 and A2. Total displacement x = x1 + x2
m1A1 = m2A2 Tension in both springs = k1x1 = k2x2
By energy conservation ;
1 1
k(A1  A 2 ) 2  kx 02 k1 k2
2 2
m
or, A1 + A2 = x0
or, A1 + A2 = x0
 Equivalent constant in series combination
m Keq is given by :
or, A1  1 A1  x 0
m2 1/keq = 1/k1 + 1/k2
m2x 0 m
or, A1  Similarly,  T  2
m1  m 2 k eq
m1x 0 In series combination, tension is same in all the

A2 = m  m springs & extension will be different. (If k is same
1 2
then deformation is also same)
2. Parallel combination : Case (b)

Extension is same for both springs but force acting If the block is displaced slightly by an amount x
will be different. then both the spring are displaced by x from their
Force acting on the system = F natural length so it is parallel combination of springs.
 F = – (k1x + k2x)  F = – (k1 + k2) x which gives
 F = – keqx keq = k1 + k2
k1 m m
T  2  2
k eq k1  k 2
k2 m
Note
 keq = k1 + k2
m
 T  2
k eq
EXAMPLE 24
Find the time period of the oscilltion of mass m in EXAMPLE 25
figure a and b. What is the equivalent spring constant The friction coefficient between the two blocks
of the spring in each case. ? shown in figure is  and the horizontal plane is
smooth.
k1 k2 k1 k2 (a) If the system is slightly displaced and released,
k3 m m
m find the time period.
(b) Find the magnitude of the frictional force
(a) (b)
between the blocks when the displacement from
Sol. In figure (a) the mean position is x.
k1k 2 (c) What can be the maximum amplitude if the

k1 k2 k1  k 2 upper block does not slip relative to the lower

block?
Which gives
k 1k 2 m
k
k1  k 2 M
k1k 2
+ k3
 k1  k 2
Sol. (a) For small amplitude, the two blocks oscillate
k3 together.
The angular frequency is
k1k 2 k1k 2  k 2 k 3  k1k 3
keq = k  k  k 3 = k1  k 2 k
1 2  and so the time period
Mm
Now m m(k1  k 2 ) Mm

T  2  2 T  2
k eq k1k 2  k 2 k 3  k1k 3 k
(b) The acceleration of the blocks at Step 1. Find the mean position. In following figure point A
displacement x from the mean position is shows mean position.
Step 2. Write down the mean position force relation from
 –kx 
a  – 2 x    figure.
Mm
mg = kx0
The resultant force on the upper block is,
 –mkx 
therefore, ma =   T=mg
Mm
T=kx0
This force is provided by the friction of the T
T
lower block. Hence, the magnitude of the x0 A
m M.P.
N.L.
 mk | x | 
frictional force is   mg
Mm
(c) Maximum force of friction required for

simple harmonic motion of the upper block Step 3. Assume that particle is performing SHM with
mkA amplitude A. Then displace the particle from its
is at the extreme positions. But the mean position.
Mm
maximum frictional force can only be  mg. Step 4. Find the total mechanical energy (E) in the displaced
Hence position since, mechanical energy in SHM remains
dE
mkA (M  m)g constant 0
 mg or, A dt
Mm k
1 1 1
* E= mv 2  I2  k(x  x 0 ) 2 – mgx
3. ENERGY METHOD : 2 2 2
Another method of finding time period of SHM is

1 1 v2 1
energy method. To understand this method we will E= mv 2  I 2  k(x  x 0 ) 2 – mgx
2 2 R 2
consider the following example.
dE 2mv dv 2Iv dv 2k(x  x 0 ) dx
  
EXAMPLE 26 dt 2 dt 2R 2 dt 2 dt
Figure shows a system consisting of pulley having

dx
radius R, a spring of force constant k and a block – mg ...(1)
dt
of mass m. Find the period of its vertical oscillation.
dx dv d 2 x
Put  v and 
dt dt dt 2
in eq. (1) put
K dE
m 0
dt
d 2 x Iv d 2x
Sol. The following steps are usually followed in this  mv   kxv  kx 0 v  mgv  0
dt 2 R 2 dt 2
method:
 I  d 2x d2 K
which gives  m  2  2  kx  0  2   0 Here 
 R  dt dt 2 I
Here I is moment of inertia of the body/particle about

d2 x k ...(2) a given axis.
 x0
dt 2  I 
 m  
 R2  Note
Section F – Simple Pendulum

v
 1. SIMPLE PENDULUM :
R
If a heavy point-mass is suspended by a weightless,
inextensible and perfectly flexible string from a rigid
support, then this arrangement is called a simple
x+x0 G.P.E=0 penduluml.
x
n.
m 
v Time period of a simple pendulum T  2  .
g
O
compare eq. (2) with S.H.M eq. the  
k m n   mgcos
2  (m  I / R 2 )
I  si mg
  T  2 mg
m  2  k
 R 
(some times we can take g =  2 for making
calculation simple)
Proof : Now taking moment of forces acting on the bob
Note
about point O.
 = T + mg
T = 0
  = –(mg sin )
Section E – Angular SHM
1. ANGULAR S.H.M. : if  is very small then sin  ~– 
If the restoring torque acting on the body in oscilla-   = – mg   ...(1)
tory motion is directly proportional to the angular Now compare eq. (1) with
displacement of body from its equillibrium position
net = – KS.H.M 
i.e.,
which gives KS.H.M = mg 
=–k
k = S.H.M. constant I m 2 
 T  2  2  2
 = angular displacement from M.P. KS.H.M mg g
S.H.M. equation is given by
EXAMPLE 28
Note
A simple pendulum is suspended from the ceiling of
• Time period of second pendulum is 2 seconds. a car which is accelerating uniformly on a horizontal
• Simple pendulum performs angular S.H.M. but due road. The acceleration of car is a0 and the length of
to small angular displacement, it is considered as the pendulum is 1. Then find the time period of small
linear S.H.M. oscillations of pendulum about the mean position.
• If time period of clock based upon simple pendulum Sol. We shall work in the car frame. As it is accelerated
increases then clock will become slow but if time with respect to the road, we shall have to apply a
period decreases then clock will become fast. psuedo force ma0 on the bob of mass m.
For mean position, the acceleration of the bob with
respect to the car should be zero. If 0 be the angle
made by the string with the vertical, the tension,
2. TIME PER IOD O F S IMP LE
weight and the peusdo force will add to zero in this
PENDULUM IN ACCELERATING
position.
REFERENCE FRAME : Hence, resultant of mg and ma 0 (say F =
 m g 2  a 02 ) has to be along the string.
T  2
g eff . where
ma 0 a 0
 tan 0  
geff = Effective acceleration due to gravity in mg g
  Now, suppose the string is further deflected by an
reference system = | g – a |
angle  as shown in figure.

a = acceleration of the point of suspension w.r.t. Now, restoring torque about point O can be given
ground. by   I
Condition for applying this formula : (F sin )  = – m 2 
  Substituting F and using sin  = , for small .
| g – a | = constant
O


If the acceleration a is upwards, then  
0
ma0
 
| g eff | g  a and T  2 
ga F mg
Time lost or gained in time t is given by
T
m g 2  a 20    = – m 2

T '  .t
T
g 2  a 02
or, – 
EXAMPLE 27 
If T = 2 sec Tnew = 3 sec.
g 2  a 02
then T = 1 sec. so ; 2 

Since time lost by clock in 3 sec is = 1 sec
This is an equation of simple harmonic motion with
1 time period.
then time lost by clock in 1 sec = sec
3 2 
T  2 2
 (g  a 02 )1/ 4
1
 Time lost by the clock in an hour =  3600
3
Note
= 1200 sec.
Section G – Compound pendulum / physical Sol. Time period of second pendulum T = 2 cm.
pendulum, Torsional pendulum
I
T  2
1. CO MP O UND P ENDULUM / Mgd
PHYSICAL PENDULUM :
Moment of inertia with respect to axis O
When a rigid body is suspended from an axis and
×
s s
× × R


 M
C.O.M
c
c
mg sin 
mg mg cos  I = MR2 + MR2 = 2MR2

made to oscillate about that then it is called the distance between centre of mass and the axis
compound pendulum. O
C = Position of centre of mass d=R
S = Point of suspension
 = Distance between point of suspension and centre 2MR 2
2  2  R = 0.5 m
of mass MgR
(it remains constant during motion for small angular
displacement "" from mean position
EXAMPLE 30
The restoring torque is given by
A circular disc has a tiny hole in it, at a distance z from
 = – mg  sin 
its center. Its mass is M and radius R(R > 2). Horizontal
 = – mg   shaft is passed through the hole and held fixed so that
 for small , sin  =  the disc can freely swing in the vertical plane. For
or, I = – mg   small distrubance, the disc performs SHM whose time
where, I = Moment of inertia about point of period is minimum for z . Find the value of z.
suspension.
I
Sol. The time period w.r.t the axis T  2 
mg Mgd
or, a= – 
I
where I = moment of inertia w.r.t the axis O
mg d = distance between C.O.M and O
or, 2 
I
×O
I z
Time period, T  2 
mg M
R C.O.M
EXAMPLE 29
A ring is suspended at a point on its rim and it
MR 2
behaves as a second's pendulum when it oscillates  I=  Mz 2
such that its centre move in its own plane. The radius 2
of the ring would be (g = 2) d=z
l
MR 2 = – (2kl ) l – mg sin  = net
 Mz 2 R2 z 2
 T  2 2  2 
Mgz 2gz g  is small  sin  
the time period will be minimum when l

net = – I 2 = – (2kl ) l – mg sin  = net
2
R2
 z = minimum
2z ml 2 3 (4kl  mg)
I=  =
3 2 ml
R2
Let say f  z
2z
2. TORSIONAL PENDULUM :
df In torsional pendulum, an extended object is
f will be minimum when 0
dz suspended at the centre by a light torsion wire. A
torsion wire is essentially inextensible, but is free to
R2 z
R twist about its axis. When the lower end of the wire
 – 1  0 
2z 2 2 is rotated by a slight amount, the wire applies a
restoring torque causing the body to oscillate
rotationally when released.
EXAMPLE 31
The restoring torque produced is given by
Find out the angular frequency of small oscillation
about axis O
A

m C A C
l X X
 = – C
k k where, C = Torsional constant
or, I = – C
where, I = Moment of inertia about the vertical
axis.
C
m l
or, = – 
 I
(1) l
(2)
Sol. mg I
k
 Time Period, T  2 
k C
(k l ) (k l )
l : The above concept of torsional pendulum is used in
inertia table to calculate the moment of inertia of
The compression in spring (1) = l  unknown body.
and the extension in spring (2) = l 
Net torque opposite to the mean position
EXAMPLE 32 Section H – Combination of two or more SHM

A uniform disc of radius 5.0 cm and mass 200 g is 1. VECTOR METHOD OF COMBINING
fixed at its centre to a metal wire, the other end of TW O OR MO R E S IMP LE
which is fixed to a ceiling. The hanging disc is rotated HARMONIC MOTIONS:
about the wire through an angle and is released. If
A simple harmonic motion is produced when a force
the disc makes torsional oscillations with time period
(called restoring force) proportional to the
0.20 s, find the torsional constant of the wire.
displacement acts on a particle. If a particle is acted
Sol. The situation is shown in figure. The moment of upon by two such forces the resultant motion of the
inertia of the disc about the wire is particle is a combination of two simple harmonic
motions.
mr 2 (0.200kg)(5.0  10 –2 m)2
I 
2 2 (i) In Same direction :
= 2.5 × 10–4 kg-m2. (a) Having same Frequencies:

The time period is given by Suppose the two individual motions are represented
by,
x1 = A1 sin t and x2 = A2 sin (t + )
Both the simple harmonic motions have same
angular frequency .
x = x1 + x2 = A1 sin t + A2 sin (t + )
= A sin (t + )
I
T  2 Here, A  A12  A22  2A1A 2 cos 
C

4 2 I A2 
or, C A
T2
A 2 sin 
4 2 (2.5  10 –4 kg  m 2 )
= 
(0.20s)2 
 A 2 cos 
A1
2
kg  m
= 0.25
s2 A2 sin 
and tan  = A  A cos 
1 2
Note
Thus, we can see that this is similar to the vector
addition. The same method of vector addition can
be applied to the combination of more than two
simple harmonic motions.
Import ant poin ts t o re member

before solving the questions:
1. Convert all the trignometric ratios into sine form 10
and ensure that t term is with +ve sign.
2. Make the sign between two term +ve. 60°
5
3. A1 is the amplitude of that S.H.M whose phase is
Phasor Diagram
small.
4. Then resultant x = Anet sin (phase of A1 + ) A  52  102  2  5  10cos60
Where Anet is the vector sum of A1 & A2 with angle
= 25  100  50  175 = 5 7
between them is the phase difference between two
S.H.M.
EXAMPLE 35
EXAMPLE 33 A particle is subjected to two simple harmonic
x1 = 3 sin t ; x2 = 4 cos t Find motions
(i) amplitude of resultant SHM. x1 = A1 sin t
(ii) equation of the resultant SHM. and x2 = A2 sin (t + /3). Find
Sol. First right all SHM's in terms of sine functions with (a) the displacment at t = 0,
positive amplitude. Keep "t" with positive sign. (b) the maximum speed of the particle and
 x1 = 3 sin t (c) the maximum acceleration of the particle.
x2 = 4 sin (t + /2) Sol. (a) At t = 0, x1 = A1 sin t = 0
and x2 = A2 sin (t + /3)
2 2 
A  3  4  2  3  4cos
2 A2 3
= A2 sin (/3) =
2
= 9  16 = 25 = 5
Thus, the resultant displacement at t = 0 is

4sin 3
2 4 x = x1 + x2 = A2
tan    2
 3  = 53°
3  4cos
2 (b) The resultant of the two motion is a simple
harmonic motion of the same angular frequency .
equation x = 5 sin (t + 53°)
The amplitude of the resultant motion is
A  A12  A 22  2A1A 2 cos(  / 3)

EXAMPLE 34
x1 = 5 sin (t + 30°) ; x2 = 10 cos (t) = A12  A 22  A1A2

Find amplitude of resultant SHM.
The maximum speed is
Sol. x1 = 5 sin (t + 30°)
umax = A  =  A12  A 22  A1A 2

x2 = 10 sin (t + )
2 (c) The maximum acceleration is
amax = A 2 = 2 A12  A 22  A1A 2
(b) Having different frequencies

x1 = A1 sin t
x2 = A2 sin 2t
then resultant displacement x = x1 + x2 = A1 sin 1t
+ A2 sin 2t This resultant motion is not SHM.
(ii) In two perpendicular directions

x = A1 sin t ...(1)
y = A2 sin (t + ) ...(2)
A2
The Amplitudes A1 and A2 may be different and  y = A .x (eq. of straight line)
1
Phase difference  and  is same.
So equation of the path may be obtained by (2) If  = 90°
eliminating t from (1) & (2)
x2 y2
  1 (Eq. of ellipse)
x A12 A22
sin t = A ...(3)
1
x2 A2
cos t = 1– ...(4)
A12
A1
(3) If  = 90° & A1 = A2 = A

then x2 + y2 = A2 (Eq. of circle.)
A
On rearranging we get
x2 y 2 2xycos 
2
 2  sin 2  ...(5)
A1 A 2 A1A 2
The above figures are called Lissajous figures.
(general eq. of ellipse)
special case :
Note
(1) If  = 0
x2 y2 2xy
 2
 2 0
A1 A 2 A1A 2
MIND MAP
1. Equation of S.H.M
(i) Linear : a = –2x
(ii) Angular :  = – 2
2. Linear SHM 3. Angular S.H.M

(i) Displacement of particle :
x = A sin (t + ) (i) Displacement :
(ii) Velocity  = 0 sin(t + )
dx
= A cos(t + ) (ii) Angular velocity
dt
d
=  A 2 – x2 = 0 cos(t + )
dt
(iii) Acceleration :
(iii) Acceleration
2
d x d2 
2 = – A2 sin( t + )    0  2 sin(t  )   2 
dt dt 2
= –  2x (iv) Phase : t + 
(iv) Phase : t + 
(v) Phase constant :  (v) Phase constant : 
5. Time Period :
4. Energy in S.H.M Pendulums :
1 (a) Simple pendulum :
(i) K = m  2 ( A 2 – x2 )
2 l
T  2
SHM g
1 (b) Physical pendulum :
(ii) U = m2x2
2
I
T  2
1 mg l
(iii) E = K + U = m2 A2 (c) Torsional pendulum :
2
= constant I
T  2
C
6. Mass-spring system Combination of springs : 7. Composition of 2 SHMs :

x1 = A1 sin t
(a) T  2 m 1 1 1
k (a) series :   x2 = A2 sin (t + )
K eff K 1 K 2
(b) Two bodies system : x = x1 + x2
(b) parallel : Keff = K1 + K2 x = A sin ( t + )

T  2 ; (c) Spring cut into two
k where, A  A12  A 22  2A1A 2 cos 
parts m : n
m1 m 2 (m  n)K (m  n)K A 2 sin 
where   m  m K1  ,K 2  and tan  
1 2 m n A 1  A 2 cos 
Exercise - 1 Objective Problems | JEE Main
Section A – Equation of SHM, Velocity and 7. A particle of mass 1 kg is undergoing S.H.M., for
Acceleration in SHM, Energy of which graph between force and displacement (from
SHM mean position) as shown. Its time period, in
1. For a particle executing simple harmonic motion, seconds, is. F(N)
the acceleration is proportional to. (A) /3 13.5
(A) displacement from the mean position (B) 2/3 1.5
–1.5 xm
(B) distance from the mean position –13.5
(C) /6
(C) distance travelled since t = 0
(D) 3/
(D) speed
2. The distance moved by a particle in simple harmonic 8. The time period of a particle in simple harmonic
motion in one time period is motion is equal to the time between consecutive
(A) A (B) 2A appearance of the particle at a particular point in its
(C) 4A (D) zero motion. This point is
(A) the mean position
2
3. Equations y = 2 A cos t and y = A(sin t + 3 (B) an extreme position
cost) represent the motion of two particles. (C) between the mean position and the positive
(A) Only one of these is S.H.M extreme.
(B) Ratio of maximum speeds is 2 : 1 (D) between the mean position and the negative
(C) Ratio of maximum speeds is 1 : 1 extreme.
(D) Ratio of maximum accelerations is 1:4
4. A particle executes S.H.M. given by the equation y

= 0.45 sin 2t where y is in meter and t is in second. Section B – Time period and angular
What is the speed of the particle when its frequency in SHM
displacement is 7.5 cm? 9. A simple harmonic motion having an amplitude A
(A) 0.075 3 ms–1 (B) 7.5 3 ms–1 and time period T is represented by the equation :
(C) 0.15 3 ms–1 (D) 15 3 ms–1 y = 5 sin(t + 4) m

Then the values of A (in m) and T (in sec) are :
5. The maximum displacement of a particle executing (A) A = 5; T = 2 (B) A = 10 ; T = 1
S.H.M. is 1 cm and the maximum acceleration is (C) A = 5 ; T = 1 (D) A = 10 ; T = 2
(1.57)2cm per sec2. Then the time period is
(A) 0.25 sec (B) 4.00 sec
10. A simple pendulum performs S.H.M. about x = 0
(C) 1.57 sec (D) (1.57)2 sec
with an amplitude a and time period T. The speed
of the pendulum at x = a/2 will be–
6. The angular frequency of motion whose equation
d2 y a 3 a 3
is 4 + 9y = 0 is (y = displacement and t = time) (A) (B)
dt 2 T 2T
9 4 3 2 a 32a
(A) (B) (C) (D) (C) (D)
4 9 2 3 T T
11. A particle performing SHM is found at its equilibrium Section C – Two block system
at t = 1 sec. and it is found to have a speed of 0.25
m/s at t = 2 sec. If the period of oscillation is 6 sec. 17. Two masses m1 and m2 are suspended together by
Calculate amplitude of oscillation a massless spring of constant K. When the masses
3 3 are in equilibrium, m1 is removed without disturbing
(A) m (B) m
2 4 the system. Then the angular frequency of
6 3
(C) m (D) oscillation of m2 is -
 8
k
12. A particle performs SHM with a period T and (A) m1
amplitude a. The mean velocity of the particle over
the time interval during which it travels a distance
k m1
a/2 from the extreme position is (B) m2 m2
(A) a/T (B) 2a/T
(C) 3a/T (D) a/2T
k k
(C) m1  m 2 (D) m1  m 2
13. The time taken by a particle performing SHM to
pass from point A to B where its velocities are same
is 2 seconds. After another 2 seconds it returns to 18. A block of mass m =1 kg placed on top of another
B. The time period of oscillation is (in seconds) block of mass M = 5 kg is attached to a horizontal
(A) 2 (B) 8 (C) 6 (D) 4 spring of force constant K = 20 N/m as shown in
figure. The coefficient of friction between the blocks
14. Two particles are in SHM on same straight line with
is µ where as the lower block slides on a friction-
amplitude A and 2A and with same angular
less surface. The amplitude of oscillation is 0.4 m.
frequency . It is observed that when first particle
What is the minimum value of µ such that the upper
is at a distance A / 2 from origin and going toward
block does not slip over the lower block ?
mean position, other particle is at extreme position
K m
on other side of mean position. Find phase difference
M
between the two particles.
(A) 45° (B) 90° (C) 135° (D) 180° (A) 0.133 (B) 0.5
(C) 0.362 (D) 0.21
15. Two particles are in SHM in a straight line about
same equilibrium position. Amplitude A and time
19. A block of mass m moves with a speed v towards
period T of both the particles are equal. At time t = the right block in equilibrium with a spring. If the
0, one particle is at displacement y1 = +A and the surface is frictionless and collisions are elastic, the
other at y2 = – A/2, and they are approaching frequency of collisions between the masses will be–
towards each other. After what time they cross
each other ? v K
(A) T/3 (B) T/4 (C) 5T/6 (D) T/6 m m
L
16. Two particles execute SHM of same amplitude of
20 cm with same period along the same line about v 1 K  v 1 K
(A)  (B) 2 2L   m 
the same equilibrium position. The maximum 2L  m  
distance between the two is 20 cm. Their phase
difference in radians is 1 2
 2L   2L 
2    (C)  + π m  (D)    m 
(A) (B) (C) (D) V K
3 2 3 4    v K 
20. Two blocks each of mass m are connected with Section D – Combination of springs
springs each of force constant K as shown in fig.
23. A body of mass 'm' hangs from three springs, each
The mass A is displaced to the left & B to the right
of spring constant 'k' as shown in the figure. If the
by the same amount and released then the time
mass is slightly displaced and let go, the system will
period of oscillation is -
oscillate with time period–
K
m m
K
K
A B m
(A) 2
3k
K K
M M
(A) 2 (B) 2 3m
K 2K (B) 2
2k m
M M
(C)  (D) 
K 2K 2m 3k
(C) 2 (D) 2
3k m
21. A block P of mass m is placed on a frictionless
surface. Another block Q of same mass is kept on
24. A block of mass m is connected between two
P, and is connected to a wall by a massless horizontal
springs (constants K1 and K2) as shown in the figure
spring of spring constant k, as shown. The
and is made to oscillate, the frequency of oscillation
coefficient of static friction between the two blocks
of the system shall be-
is s. Blocks P and Q are moved together to stretch
the spring by a distance A. When released, the
blocks oscillate without slipping. The maximum
frictional force between P and Q is
(A) 0
1/ 2 1/ 2
(B) Ka 1  m  1  K1K 2 
k (A)   (B)  
2   K1  K 2  2   (K1  K 2 )m 
kA Q s
(C)
2
P 1/ 2
SMOOTH 1/ 2
(D) s mg 1  K1  K 2  1  (K1  K 2 )m 
(C)   (D)  
2  m  2   K1K 2 
22. Four springs of constant as shown are attached to
a pair of masses m each as shown. The time period
25. Two springs of the same material but of length L
will be 2 times-
and 2L are suspended with masses M and 2M
k attached at their lower ends. Their time periods when
2k 2k they are allowed to oscillate
m m
k will be in the ratio
(A) 1 : 2
m 2m
(B) 2 : 1
(A) (B) (C) 1 : 4
k k
(D) 4 : 1
4m 3m
(C) (D)
k 4k
Section E,F – Angular shm & simple 31. A simple pendulum with length  and bob of mass
pendulum m executes SHM of small amplitude A. The
26. Two identical simple pendulums A and B are fixed maximum tension in the string will be
at same point. They are displaced by very small (A) mg (1 + A/) (B) mg (1 + A/)2
angles  and  (  > ) and released from rest. (C) mg [1 + (A/) ] 2
(D) 2 mg
Find the time after which B reaches its initial position
for the first time. Collisions are elastic and length 32. Two pendulums have time periods T and 5T/4. They
of strings is . start SHM at the same time from the mean position.
 After how many oscillations of the smaller
 
(A)  g pendulum they will be again in the same phase
(A) 5 (B) 4 (C) 11 (D) 9
 B
(B) 2 g A
33. A hollow metal sphere is filled with water and hung
by a long thread. A small hole is drilled at the bottom
  2  through which water slowly flows out. Now the
(C)  g (D)  g sphere is made to oscillate, the period of oscillation
of the pendulum -
27. A pendulum of length 10 cm is hanged by wall making (A) remains constant
an angle 3° with vertical. It is swinged to position (B) continuously decreases
B. Time period of pendulum will be (C) continuously increases
(A) /5 sec (D) first increases and then decreases
2 3° 6°
(B) sec 34. The angular velocity and the amplitude of a simple
15
B
pendulum is  and a respectively. At a displacement
(C) /6 sec
x from the mean position if its kinetic energy is T
(D) Subsequent A
and potential energy is V, then the ratio of T to V is
motion will not be periodic
(A) x22/(a2–x22) (B) x2/(a2 – x2)
2 2 2 2 2
28. The pendulum of the grandfather’s clock takes 1 (C) (a –x  ) / x  (D) (a2–x 2)/ x 2
sec to oscillate from one end to another a distance
of 10 cms. Considering it a simple pendulum, find 35. Find the velocity when KE = PE of the body
its maximum velocity- undergoing SHM. Amplitude = x0 and angular
(A) 4 cms/sec (B) 8 cms/sec frequency is . How many times in a cycle
(C) 12 cms/sec (D) 16 cms/sec KE = PE ?
29. In an elevator, a spring clock of time period TS (mass x 0
(A) ,2 (B) x0, 2
attached to a spring) and a pendulum clock of time 2
period TP are kept. If the elevator accelerates upwards
(A) TS well as TP increases x 0
(C) ,4 (D) x , 4
(B) TS remain same, TP increases 2 0
(C) TS remains same, TP decreases

(D) TS as well as TP decreases Section G – Compound pendulum / physical
pendulum, torsional pendulum
30. A simple pendulum is oscillating in a lift. If the lift is
36. A ring is suspended at a point on its rim and it
going down with constant velocity, the time period of
behaves as a second’s pendulum when it oscillates
the simple pendulum is T1. If the lift is going down
such that its centre move in its own plane. The radius
with some retardation its time period is T2, then
of the ring would be (g = 2)
(A) T1 > T2 (B) T1 < T2
(C) T1 = T2 (A) 0.5 m (B) 1.0 m
(D) depends upon the mass of the pendulum bob (C) 0.67 m (D) 1.5 m
37. A rod of mass m, length  is held horizontal, using a Section H – Combination of two or more SHM
vertical string through its centre. If it is turned a 41. A particle is subjected to two mutually perpendicular
little, the frequency of oscillation will be proportional simple harmonic motions such that its x and y
to- [C-torsional constant of the string] coordinates are given by x = 2 sin t ; y = 2
3C
(A)  
m 2 sin  t  
(m, )  4
12C
(B) The path of the particle will be :
m
12C m (A) an ellipse (B) a straight line
(C) (D) (C) a parabola (D) a circle
m 2 12C
38. A long uniform rod of length L, mass M is free to 42. The amplitude of the vibrating particle due to
rotate in a horizontal plane about a vertical axis
through its end. Two springs of constant K each  
superposition of two SHMs, y1 = sin  t   and
are connected as shown. On equilibrium, the rod  3
was horizontal. The frequency will be – y2 = sin t is :
1 15 K (A) 1 (B)
(A) y 2
2 M 
L L (C) (D) 2
1 15 2 2
3
(B) K
K
2 4M
1 3K 1 15 K 43. Two simple harmonic motions y1 = A sin t and y2
(C) (D)
2 4 M 2 4M = A cos t are superimposed on a particle of mass
m. The total mechanical energy of the particle is :
39. A solid ball of mass m is allowed to fall from a
height h to a pan suspended with a spring of spring 1
(A) m2A2 (B) m2A2
constant k. Assume the ball does not rebound and 2
pan is massless, then amplitude of the oscillation is -
1
mg (C) m2A2 (D) zero
(A) 4
k
k
1/ 2
mg  2hk  44. The displacement of two identical particles executing
(B) +  mg 
k   SHM are represented by equations
 
1  2hk mg 2hk x1 = 4 sin 10 t  6  and x2 = 5 cos t
(C) mg 1  mg (D) 1
mg
 
k
For what value of  energy of both the
40. A uniform thin rod has a mass 1 kg and carries a particles is same ?
mass 2.5 kg at B. The rod is hinged at A and is
(A) 16 unit (B) 6 unit
maintained in the horizontal position by a spring
having a spring constant 18 kNm–1 at C as shown (C) 4 unit (D) 8 unit
in figure. The angular frequency
of oscillation is nearly-
(A) 10 rad/s
(B) 20 rad/s
(C) 40 rad/s A
C B
2.5 kg
(D) 80 rad/s 0.3 m 0.3 m
Exercise - 2 (Leve-I) Objective Problems | JEE Main
Section A – Equation of SHM, Velocity and 5. The average acceleration in one time period in a
Acceleration in SHM, Energy of simple harmonic motion is
SHM (A) A 2 (B) A 2/2
1. The maximum acceleration of a particle in SHM is
(C) A 2/ 2 (D) zero
made two times keeping the maximum speed to be
constant. It is possible when 6. The time period of a particle in simple harmonic
motion is equal to the smallest time between the
(A) amplitude of oscillation is doubled while 
frequency remains constant particle acquiring a particular velocity v . The value
of v is
(B) amplitude is doubled while frequency is halved
(A) vmax (B) 0
(C) frequency is doubled while amplitude is halved
(C) between 0 and vmax (D) between 0 and –vmax
(D) frequency is doubled while amplitude remains
constant.
7. A particle executing a simple harmonic motion of
period 2s. When it is at its extreme displacement
2. A body performs simple harmonic oscillations along
from its mean position, it receives an additional
the straight line ABCDE with C as the midpoint of
energy equal to what it had in its mean position.
AE. Its kinetic energies at B and D are each one
Due to this, in its subsequent motion,
fourth of its maximum value. If AE = 2R, the
distance between B and D is (A) its amplitude will change and become equal
to 2 times its previous amplitude
A B C D E
(B) its periodic time will become doubled i.e. 4s
R (C) its potential energy will be decreased

3R
(A) (B) (D) it will continue to execute simple harmonic
2 2
motion of the same amplitude and period as before
(C) 3R (D) 2R receiving the additional energy.
3. A particle moves along the x-axis according to x = 8. Part of a simple harmonic motion is graphed in the figure,
A. [1 + sin t]. What distance does it travel where y is the displacement from the mean position.
between t=0 and t=2.5/? The correct equation describing this S.H.M is
(A) 4A (B) 6A (A) y = 4 cos (0.6t)
(C) 5A (D) None 2

 10 
(B) y = 2 sin  t – 
 3 2
(0.6) t(s)
4. The displacement of a body executing SHM is given O (0.3)
by x = A sin(2t + /3). The first time from t = 0  10 
when the velocity is maximum is (C) y = 4 sin  t   –2
 3 2
(A) 0.33 sec (B) 0.16 sec
(C) 0.25 sec (D) 0.5 sec  10 
(D) y = 2 cos  t  
 3 2
9. Speed v of a particle moving along a straight line, 13. Two particles P and Q describe simple harmonic
when it is at a distance x from a fixed point on the motions of same period, same amplitude, along the
line is given by v2 = 108 – 9x2 (all quantities in S.I. same line about the same equilibrium position O.
unit). Then When P and Q are on opposite sides of O at the
same distance from O they have the same speed
(A) The motion is uniformly accelerated along the of 1.2 m/s in the same direction, when their
straight line displacements are the same they have the same
(B) The magnitude of the acceleration at a distance speed of 1.6 m/s in opposite directions. The
3 cm from the fixed point is 0.27 m/s2. maximum velocity in m/s of either particle is
(C) The motion is simple harmonic about (A) 2.8 (B) 2.5
x = 12 m. (C) 2.4 (D) 2
(D) The maximum displacement from the fixed point 14. A particle executes SHM on a straight line path.
is 4 cm. The amplitude of oscillation is 2 cm. When the
displacement of the particle from the mean position
is 1 cm, the numerical value of magnitude of
acceleration is equal to the numerical value of
Section B – Time period and angular magnitude of velocity. The frequency of SHM (in
frequency in SHM second–1) is
10. A small mass executes linear SHM about O with
amplitude a and period T. Its displacement from O 2
(A) 2  3 (B)
at time T/8 after passing through O is : 3
(A) a/8 (B) a/2 2

3 1
(C) (D)
(C) a/2 (D) a / 2 2 2 3
11. A particle executes SHM with time period T and 15. Two particles undergo SHM along parallel lines with
amplitude A. The maximum possible average the same time period (T) and equal amplitudes. At
T a particular instant, one particle is at its extreme
velocity in time is : position while the other is at its mean position. They
4
move in the same direction. They will cross each
2A 4A other after a further time
(A) (B)
T T
B O A
8A 4 2A O’
(C) (D) B’ A’
T T
(A) T/8 (B) 3T/8
12. Time period of a particle executing SHM is 8 sec. (C) T/6 (D) 4T/3
At t = 0 it is at the mean position. The ratio of the
distance covered by the particle in the 1 st second 16. A particle is executing SHM of amplitude A, about
to the 2nd second is the mean position X = 0. Which of the following
cannot be a possible phase difference between
1
(A) (B) the positions of the particle at x = + A/2 and
2 1 2
x = – A/ 2 .
1 (A) 75° (B) 165°
(C) (D) 2 +1
2 (C) 135° (D) 195°
Section C – Two block system 21. Two blocks of mass 10 kg and 2 kg are connected
17. Vertical displacement of a plank with a body of by an ideal spring of spring constant 1000 N/m and
mass ‘m’ on it is varying according to law y = sin the system is placed on a horizontal surface as
shown.
t + 3 cos t. The minimum value of  for
which the mass just breaks off the plank and the 10kg 2kg
moment it occurs first after t = 0 are given by (y  
is positive vertically upwards)
The coefficient of friction between 10 kg block and
g 2  g 2  surface is 0.5 but friction is assumed to be absent
(A) , (B) ,
2 6 g 2 3 g between 2 kg and surface. Initially blocks are at
rest and spring is unstretched then 2 kg block is
g  2 2
(C) , (D) 2g, displaced by 1 cm to elongate the spring then
2 3 g 3g
released. Then the graph representing magnitude
of frictional force on 10 kg block and time t is :
18. A 2 Kg block moving with 10 m/s strikes a spring
of constant 2 N/m attached to 2 Kg block at rest (Time t is measured from that instant when 2 kg
kept on a smooth floor. The time for which rear block is released to move)
moving block remain in contact with spring will be f f
(A) 2 sec (A) (B)
10m/s
t t
1 2kg 2kg
(B) sec
2 f
1 (C) (D) None of these

(C) 1 sec (D) sec t
2
19. In the above question, the velocity of the rear 2

kg block after it separates from the spring will be :
Section D – Combination of springs
(A) 0 m/s (B) 5 m/s
(C) 10 m/s (D) 7.5 m/s 22. A body at the end of a spring executes S.H.M. with
a period t 1, while the corresponding period for
20. In the figure, the block of mass m, attached to the another spring is t2. If the period of oscillation with
spring of stiffness k is in contact with the completely the two spring in series is T, then
elastic wall, and the compression in the spring is (A) T = t1 + t2 (B) T2 = t12 + t22
‘e’. The spring is compressed further by ‘e’ by
displacing the blocktowards left and is then released. 1 1 1 1 1 1
(C) T  t  t (D) T 2  t 2  t 2
If the collision between the block and the wall is 1 2 1 2
completely elastic then the time period of oscillations
of the block will be :
23. The springs in fig. A and B are identical but length
2 m Wall
(A) in A is three times each of that in B. The ratio of
3 k period TA/TB is
A B
m (A) 3
(B) 2
k m (B) 1/3
(C) 3
 m  m m m
(C) (D) (D) 1/3
3 k 6 k
24. A particle of mass m moves in the potential energy 27. What is the spring constant for the combination of
U shown above. The period of the motion when spring shown in fig. ?
the particle has total energy E is (A) k 2k
(B) 2k
U(x) m
(C) 4k
5k k k
(D)
1
U = 2 kx2, x < 0 U = mgx, x > 0 2
x
Section E,F – Angular shm & simple
pendulum
28. The free end of a simple pendulum is attached to
(A) 2 m / k + 4 2E / mg 2 the ceiling of a box. The box is taken to a height
and the pendulum and box are released to fall freely.
(B) 2 m / k As seen from the box during this period, the bob
will
(C)  m / k + 2 2E / mg 2 (A) continue its oscillation as before
(B) stop
(D) 2 2E / mg 2 (C) will go in a circular path
(D) move on a straight line.
25. Four springs are attached to a mass m as shown. 29. A simple pendulum has some time period T. What
The time period will be 2 times of– will be the percentage change in its time period if
its amplitudes is decreased by 5 % ?
K
2K 2K (A) 6 % (B) 3 %
m (C) 1.5 % (D) 0 %
2K
30. A simple pendulum has time period T1. When the
m 2m point of suspension moves vertically up according
(A) (B) to the equation y = kt2 where k = 1 m/s2 and 't' is
K K
time then the time period of the pendulum is T2 then
4m m 2
(C) (D)  T1 
K 4K   is
 T2 
26. A block of mass m is suspended by different springs 5 11

(A) (B)
of force constant shown in figure. 6 10
6 5
2k
(C) (D)
k 5 4
2k 2k m
2k 31. A bob B of mass 1 kg is suspended form the ceiling
k
m of a toy train as shown in the figure. The train
m
m oscillates simple harmonically in horizontal direction
with angular frequency  = 5 rad/s and amplitude a
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) = 0.1m. What is the ratio of maximum and minimum
tensions in the string AB during the motion (g = 10
Let time period of oscillation in these four positions
ms–2 & tan 37° = 3/4)
be T1, T2, T3 and T4 Then -
(A) 2 37°
(A) T1 = T2 = T4 (B) T1 = T2 and T3 = T4 A
(B) 3 B
(C) T1 = T2 = T3 (D) T1 = T3 and T2 = T4 (C) 4
(D) 1
32. A small bob attached to a light inextensible thread 35. A simple pendulum fixed in a car has a time period
of length l has a periodic time T when allowed to of 4 seconds when the car is moving uniformly on a
vibrate as a simple pendulum. The thread is now horizontal road. When the accelerator is pressed, the
suspended from a fixed end O of a vertical rigid time period changes to 3.99 seconds. Making an
approximate analysis, find the acceleration of the car.
3
rod of length (as in figure). If now the pendulum
4 g g
(A) (B)
performs periodic oscillations in this arrangement, 2 6
the
g g
periodic time will be (C) (D)
10 23
O
3T
(A)
4 Section G – Compound pendulum / physical
3l
4 l pendulum, torsional pendulum
T
(B) 36. A man is swinging on a swing made of 2 ropes of
2
equal length L and in direction perpendicular to the
(C) T A plane of paper. The time period of the small
(D) 2T oscillations about the mean position is
L
33. A simple pendulum has time period T. A uniform (A) 2
2g
rod, whose length is the same as that of the
pendulum, undergoes small oscillations about its
upper end. Its time period of oscillation will be - 3L
(B) 2
2g L
(A) < T (B) T
(C) > T L L
L
(D) may be (A), (B) or (C) depending on whether (C) 2
2 3g
T is <, equal to or > 2 seconds M
L
34. The angular frequency of a spring block system is (D) 
g
0. This system is suspended from the ceiling of an
elevator moving downwards with a constant speed
v0. The block is at rest relative to the elevator. Lift 37. A system of two identical rods (L-shaped) of mass
is suddenly stopped. Assuming the downwards as m and length l are resting on a peg P as shown in
a positive direction, choose the wrong statement. the figure. If the system is displaced in its plane by
a small angle , find the period of oscillations.
v0
(A) The amplitude of the block is 
0 2l P
(A) 2 l l
(B) The initial phase of the block is . 3g
v0
(C) The equation of motion for the block is  sin 0t. 2 2l
0 (B) 2
3g
(D) The maximum speed of the block is v0. 2l l

(C) 2 (D) 3
3g 3g
38. A ring of diameter 2m oscillates as a compound Section H – Combination of two or more SHM
pendulum about a horizontal axis passing through a 41. The graph plotted between phase angle () and
point at its rim. It oscillates such that its centre move displacement of a particle from equilibrium position
in a plane which is perpendicular to the plane of the (y) is a sinusoidal curve as shown below. Then the
ring. The equivalent length of the simple pendulum best matching is
is
(A) 2m (B) 4m y
(C) 1.5 m (D) 3m
3 /2 2
39. A uniform hoop of mass M and radius R hangs in a O /2 P t
vertical plane supported by a knife edge at one point
on the inside circumference. Calculate the natural
frequency of small oscillation. Column A Column B
1 g 1 3g
(A) (B) (A) K. E. versus phase (P)
2 R 2  2R
angle curve
1 g 1 g
(C) (D)
2  2R 2  3R (B) P.E. versus phase (Q)
angle curve
40. Find the ratio of the periods of the two torsion
pendula shown in figure. The two differ only by the (C) T.e. versus phase (R)
addition of cylindrical masses as shown in the figure.
angle curve
The radius of each additional mass is 1/4 the radius
of the disc. Each cylinder and disc have equal mass.
(D) Velocity versus phase (S)
angle curve
3
R
4 R (A) A  P ; B  Q ; C  R ; D  S
4 (B) A  Q ; B  P ; C  R ; D  S
M M M M (C) A  Q ; B  P ; C  S ; D  R
R R (D) A  Q ; B  R ; C  S ; D  P
3/ 2 3/ 2
2 3
(A)   (B)  
3 2
1/ 2 1/ 2
2 3
(C)   (D)  
3 2
Exercise - 2 (Level-II) Multiple Correct | JEE Advanced
Section A – Equation of SHM, Velocity and 5. A particle is executing SHM with amplitude A, time
Acceleration in SHM, Energy of period T, maximum acceleration a0 and maximum
SHM
velocity v0. Its starts from mean position at t = 0
1. A spring has natural length 40 cm and spring and at time t, it has the displacement A/2, accelera-
constant 500 N/m. A block of mass 1 kg is attached
tion a and velocity v then
at one end of the spring and other end of the spring
is attached to ceiling. The block released from the (A) t = T/12 (B) a = a0/2
position, where the spring has length 45 cm. (C) v = v0/2 (D) t = T/8
(A) the block will perform SHM of amplitude 5 cm.
(B) the block will have maximum velocity 30 5 6. The displacement of a particle varies according to
cm/sec. the relation x = 3 sin 100t + 8 cos2 50t. Which of
(C) the block will have maximum acceleration the following is/are correct about this motion.
15 m/s2. (A) the motion of the particle is not S.H.M.
(D) the minimum potential energy of the spring will (B) the amplitude of the S.H.M. of the particle is 5
be zero. units
(C) the amplitude of the resultant S.H.M. is 73
2. The potential energy of a particle of mass 0.1 kg,
moving along x-axis, is given by U = 5x (x – 4) J units
where x is in metres. It can be concluded that (D) the maximum displacement of the particle from
(A) the particle is acted upon by a constant force the origin is 9 units.
(B) the speed of the particle is maximum at x = 2 m
(C) the particle executes simple harmonic motion 7. For a particle executing S.H.M., x = displacement
(D) the period of oscillation of the particle is /5 s from equilibrium position, v = velocity at any instant
and a = acceleration at any instant, then
3. The amplitude of a particle executing SHM about (A) v-x graph is a circle
O is 10 cm. Then
(B) v-x graph is an ellipse
(A) When the K.E. is 0.64 of its max. K.E. its
displacement is 6cm from O. (C) a-x graph is a straight line
(B) When the displacement is 5 cm from O its K.E. (D) a-v graph is an ellipse
is 0.75 of its max. P.E.
(C) Its total energy at any point is equal to its 8. The figure shows a graph between velocity and
maximum K.E. displacement (from mean position) of a particle
(D) Its velocity is half the maximum velocity when performing SHM
its displacement is half the maximum displacement.
v(in cm/s)
10
Section B – Time period and angular 2.5
frequency in SHM x
(in cm)
4. The equation of motion for an oscillating particle is
given by x = 3sin (4t) + 4 cos(4t), where x is in
mm and t is in second (A) the time period of the particle is 1.57 s
(A) The motion is simple harmonic (B) the maximum acceleration will be 40cm/s2
(B) The period of oscillation is 0.5 s
(C) The amplitude of oscillation is 5 mm (C) the velocity of particle is 2 21 cm/s when it is
(D) The particle starts its motion from the equilibrium at a distance 1 cm from the mean position.
(D) none of these
Section C – Two block system Section H – Combination of two or more SHM

9. Two blocks of masses 3 kg and 6 kg rest on a 12. A particle moves in xy plane according to the law
horizontal smooth surface. The 3 kg block is x = a sin t and y = a(1 – cos t) where a and 
attached to a spring with a force constant k = 900 are constants. The particle traces
Nm–1 which is compressed 2 m from beyond the (A) a parabola
equilibrium position. The 6 kg mass is at rest at 1m (B) a straight line equallyinclined to x and y axes
from mean position. 3kg mass strikes the 6 kg mass (C) a circle
and the two stick together. (D) a distance proportional to time
1m
13. A particle is subjected to two simple harmonic
motion along x and y-directions according to
2m equations
3kg 6kg
x = 4sin100t and y = 3sin100t
equilibrium Choose the correct statement –
position (A) Motion of particle will be on an ellipse
(B) Motion of the particle will be on a straight line
(A) velocity of the combined masses immediately (C) Particle will execute SHM of amplitude 5
after the collision is 10 ms–1 (D) Particle will not execute SHM
(B) velocity of the combined masses immediately
after thecollision is 5 ms–1 14. A system is oscillating with undamped simple
(C) amplitude of the resulting oscillation is 2 m harmonic motion. Then the
(D) amplitude of the resulting oscillation is 5/2 m (A) average total energy per cycle of the motion is
its maximum kinetic energy.
(B) average total energy per cycle of the motion is
Section E,F – Angular shm & simple 1
pendulum times its maximum kinetic energy..
2
10. A simple pendulum of Length  and mass (M) is
oscillating in a plane about a vertical line between 1
(C) root mean square velocity is times its
the angular limits – to +. For an angular 2
displacement (<||), the tension in the string T and maximum velocity
velocity of the bob V are related as- (D) mean velocity is 1/2 of maximum velocity.
(A) Tcos = Mg
(B) T = Mgcos + MV2/R 15. A 20 gm particle is subjected to two simple harmonic
(C) Tangential acceleration is g sin motions
(D) T = Mgcos x1 = 2 sin 10 t,

11. A pendulum suspended from the roof of an elevator x2 = 4 sin(10 t + ). Where x1 & x2 are in metre &
3
at rest has a time period T1; when the elevator
t is in sec.
moves up with an acceleration a its time period
(A) The displacement of the particle at t = 0 will be
becomes T2; when the elevator moves down with
an acceleration a; its time period becomes T3 2 3 m.
then – (B) Maximum speed of the particle will be 20 7 m/s.
(A) T3 > T2 and T1 (B) T2 > T3 > T1 (C) Magnitude of maximum acceleration of the
T2 T3 2 particle will be 200 7 m/s2.
(C) T1 = (D) T1 = T22  T32 (D) Energy of the resultant motion will be 28 J.
T22  T32
Exercise - 3 | Level-I Subjective | JEE Advanced
Section A – Equation of SHM, Velocity and 7. A body is executing SHM under the action of force
Acceleration in SHM, Energy of whose maximum magnitude is 50N. Find the
SHM magnitude of force acting on the particle at the time
1. The equation of a particle executing SHM is when its energy is half kinetic and half potential.
 
x  (5m)sin ( s –1 )t   .Write down the amplitude,
 6 8. The figure shows the displacement - time graph of
phase constant, time period and maximum speed.
a particle executing SHM. If the time period of
oscillation is 2s, then the equation of motion is given
2. A particle having mass 10 g oscillates according to
by x = ................. .

the equation x = (2.0 cm) sin [100 s–1] t + ]. Find
6 x
(a) the amplitude, the time period and the force
constant (b) the position, the velocity and the
acceleration at t = 0. 10
mm
5
3. The equation of motion of a particle started at t = 0
0
is given by x = 5 sin (20 t + /3) where x is in t(s)
centimetre and t in second. When does the particle.
(a) first come to rest ?
(b) first have zero acceleration ?
Section C – Two block system
(c) first have maximum speed ?
9. A 1kg block is executing simple harmonic motion
4. A body undergoing SHM about the origin has its of amplitude 0.1 m on a smooth horizontal surface
equation is given by x = 0.2 cos 5t. Find its aver- under the restoring force of a spring of spring
age speed from t = 0 to t = 0.7 sec. constant 100 N/m. A block of mass 3 kg is gently
placed on it at the instant it passes through the mean
position. Assuming that the two blocks move
Section B – Time period and angular together, find the frequency and the amplitude of
frequency in SHM the motion.
5. A force f = –10x + 2 acts on a particle of mass 0.1
kg, where ‘k’ is in m and F in newton. If it is re-
leased from rest at x = –2 m, find : 3kg
(A) Amplitude (b) Time period

1kg
(c) Equation of motion
6. Potential energy (U) of a body of unit mass moving

in a one-dimension conservative force fileld is given 10. The system shown in the figure can move on a
by, U = (x2 – 4x + 3). All units are in S.I. smooth surface. The spring is initially compressed
by 6 cm and then released. Find
(i) Find the equilibrium position of the body.
(ii) Show that oscillations of the body about this k = 800 N/m 6 kg
3 kg
equilibrium position is simple harmonic motion &
find its timeperiod.
(a) Time period
(iii) Find the amplitude of oscillations if speed of the
(b) Amplitude of 3 kg block
body at equilibrium position is 2 6 m/s.
(c) Maximum momentum of 6 kg block
Section D – Combination of springs Section G – Compound pendulum / physical

11. Two identical springs are attached pendulum, torsional pendulum
to a small block P. The other 15. A simple pendulum of length  is suspended through
ends of the springs are A the ceiling of an elevator. Find the time period of
small oscillations if the elevator (a) is going up with
fixed at A and B. When P is in
an acceleration a0 (b) is going down with an
equilibrium the extension of top P acceleration a0 and (c) is moving with a uniform
spring is 20 cm and extension of velocity.
bottom spring is 10 cm. Find the
period of small vertical
B
oscillations of P about its Section H – Combination of two or more SHM
equilibrium position. (use g=9.8
m/s2) 16. Two identical rods each of mass m and
length L, are rigidly joined
and then S
12. The springs shown in the figure are all unstretched
in the beginning when a man starts pulling the block. suspended in a
The man exerts a constant force F on the block. vertical plane so as to
Find the amplitude and the frequency of the motion oscillate freely about an
of the block. axis normal to the plane
of paper passing through ‘S’ (point of supension).
k1 M
Find the time period of such small oscillations.
k2 k3 F
17. A simple pendulum has a time period

T = 2 sec when it swings freely. The
pendulum is hung as
Section E,F – Angular shm & simple shown in figure. so
sta
cle
pendulum
that only one-fourth of its
ob
13. A pendulum having time period equal to two seconds total length is free to swing
is called a seconds pendulum. Those used in to the left of obstacle. It is
pendulum clocks are of this type. Find the length of B A
displaced to position A and released. How long does
a seconds pendulum at a place where g = 2 m/s2
it take to swing to extreme displacement B and
return to A? Assume that displacement angle is
always small.
14. A pendulum is suspended in a lift and its period of
oscillation is T0 when the lift is stationary.
18. The resulting amplitude A and the phase of the
(i) What will the period T of oscillation of pendulum
be, if the lift begins to accelerate downwards with A
vibrations  S = A cos (t) + cos
2
3g
an acceleration equal to ?
4   A A  3 
 t   + cos (t+ ) + cos  t   =
(ii) What must be the acceleration of the lift for the  2  4 8  2 
T0 A cos (t + ) are ....... and ......... respectively.

period of oscillation of the pendulum to be ?
2
Exercise - 3 | Level-II Subjective | JEE Advanced
Section A – Equation of SHM, Velocity and 6. The motion of a particle is described by x = 30 sin
Acceleration in SHM, Energy of (t + /6), where x is in cm and t in sec. Potential
SHM energy of the particle is twice of kinetic energy for
the first time after t = 0 when the particle is at
1. A point particle of mass 0.1 kg is executing SHM position ............. after .......... time.
with amplitude of 0.1 m. When the particle passes
through the mean position, its K.E. is 8 × 10–3J.
Obtain the equation of motion of this particle if the Section C – Two block system
initial phase of oscillation is 45°.
7. One end of an ideal spring is fixed to a wall at origin
O and the axis of spring is parallel to a x-axis. A
2. The particle executing SHM in a straight line has block of mass m = 1 kg is attached to free end of the
velocities 8 m/s, 7 m/s, 4 m/s at three points distant spring and it is performing SHM. Equation of position
one metre from each other. What will be the of block in coordinate system shown is x = 10 + 3
maximum velocity of the particle? sin10t, t is in second and x in cm. Another block of
mass M = 3kg, moving towards the origin with velocity
3. The acceleration-displacement (a – x) graph of a 30 cm/s collides with the block performing SHM at
particle executing simple harmonic motion is shown t = 0 and gets struck to it, calculate :
in the figure. Find the frequency of oscillation. (i) new amplitude of oscillations.
(ii) new equation for position of the combined body.
a
(iii) loss of energy during collision. Neglect friction.
1kg 3kg
– O x
–
8. Two blocks A (2kg) and B(3kg) rest up on a smooth
horizontal surface are connected by a spring of
stiffness 120 N/m. Initially the spring is underformed.
A is imparted a velocity of 2m/s along the line of
Section B – Time period and angular the spring away from B. Find the displacement of
frequency in SHM A t second later.
3kg 2kg 2m/s
4. Two particles A and B execute SHM along the same
B A
line with the same amplitude a, same frequency and
same equilibrium position O. If the phase difference
between them is  = 2 sin–1 (0.9), then find the Section D – Combination of springs
maximum distance between the two.
9. A mass M is in static equilibrium on a massless
vertical spring as shown in the figure. A ball of mass
5. A body is in SHM with period T when oscillated
m dropped from certain height sticks to the mass
from a freely suspended spring. If this spring is cut
M after colliding with it. The oscillations they
in two parts of length ratio 1 : 3 & again oscillated
perform reach to height ‘a’ above the original level
from the two parts separately, then the periods are
of scales & depth ‘b’ below it.
T1 & T2 then find T1/T2.
(a) Find the force constant of the spring.;
12. The angle made by the string of a simple pendulum with

M a

b the vertical depends on time as  = sin[s–1)t].
90
Find the length of the pendulum if g = 2 m/s2.
(b) Find the oscillation frequency. 13. An object of mass 0.2 kg executes SHM along the
x-axis with frequency of (25/) Hz. At the point x
(c) What is the height above the initial level from
= 0.04m the object has KE 0.5 J and PE 0.4 J. The
which the mass m was droped ?
amplitude of oscillation is _____________.
10. Two identical balls A and B each of mass 0.1 kg

are attached to two identical massless springs. The
spring mass system is constrained to move inside a Section G – Compound pendulum / physical
rigid smooth pipe in the form of a circle as in fig. pendulum, torsional pendulum
The pipe is fixed in a horizontal plane. The centres
14. An ideal gas is enclosed in a vertical cylinderical
of the ball can move in a circle of radius 0.06 m.
container and supports a freely moving piston of
Each spring has a natural length 0.06 m and force
mass m. The piston and the cylinder have equal
constant 0.1 N/m. Initially both the balls are
cross-sectional area A, atmospheric pressure is P0
displaced by an angle of  =/6 radian with respect
and when the piston is in equilibrium position. Show
to diameter PQ of the circle and released from rest
that the piston executes SHM and find the frequency
of oscillation (system is completely isolated from
the surrounding).  = Cp/Cv. Height of the gas in
equilibrium position is h.
(a) Calculate the frequency of oscillation of the ball B. Section H – Combination of two or more SHM
(b) What is the total energy of the system.
15. Two particles A and B perform SHM along the same
(c) Find the speed of the ball A when A and B are
straight line with the same amplitude ‘a’, same
at the two ends of the diameter PQ.
frequency ‘f’ and same equilibrium position ‘O’.
The greatest distance between them is found to be
Section E,F – Angular shm & simple 3a/2. At some instant of time they have the same
pendulum displacement from mean position. What is the
displacement?
11. (a) Find the time period of oscillations of a torsional
pendulum, if the torsional constant of the wire is
K = 102J/rad. The moment of inertia of rigid body
is 10 kg m2 about the axis of rotation.
(b) A simple pendulum of length l = 0.5 m is hanging
from ceiling of a car. The car is kept on a horizontal
plane. The car starts accelerating on the horizontal
road with acceleration of 5 m/s2. Find the time
period of oscillations of the pendulum for small
amplitudes about the mean position.
Exercise - 4 | Level-I Previous Year | JEE Main
1. If a simple harmonic motion is represented by 5. Starting from the origin a body oxcillates simple
harmonically with a period of 2 s. After what time
d2x will its kinetic energy be 75% of the total energy ?
 αx  0 , its time period is [AIEEE 2005]
dt 2
1 1
(A) s (B) s [AIEEE 2006]
2π 2π 6 4
(A) (B)
α α
1 1
(C) s (D) s
(C) 2 πα (D) 2 π α 3 12
2. Two simple harmonic motions are represented by 6. The maximum velocity of a particle, executing simple
harmonic motion with an amplitude 7 mm, is
 π
the equations y1 = 0.1 sin 100 πt   and y2 = 0.1 4.4 ms–1. The period of oscillation is
 3
[AIEEE 2006]
cos t. The phase difference of the velocity of (A) 0.01 s (B) 10 s
particle1, with respect to the velocity of particle 2 is (C) 0.1 s (D) 100 s
[AIEEE 2005]
π π 7. The displacement of an object attached to a spring
(A) (B) and executing simple harmonic motion is given by
6 3
π π x  2  102 cos πt metre. The time at which the
(C) (D)
3 3 maximum speed first occurs is [AIEEE 2007]
(A) 0.5 s (B) 0.75 s
3. The function sin 2  ωt  represents [AIEEE 2005] (C) 0.125 s (D) 0.25 s
(A) a periodic, but not simple harmonic, motion with

8. A particle of mass m executes simple harmonic
a period 2/ motion with amplitude a and frequency v. The
(B) a periodic, but not simple harmonic with a period / average kinetic energy during its motion from the
(C) a simple harmonic motion with a period 2/ position of equilibrium to the end is [AIEEE 2007]
(D) a simple harmonic motion with a period / 1 2 2
(A) 2 ma 2 v 2 (B) ma v
4
4. The bob of a simple pendulum is a spherical hollow (C) 4 2 ma 2 v 2 (D) 2 2 ma 2 v 2
ball filled with water. A plugged hole near the bottom
of the oscillating bob gets suddenly unplugged.
9. Two springs, of force constants k1 and k2, are
During observation, till water is coming out, the time connected to a mass m as shown. The frequency
period of oscillation would [AIEEE 2005] of oscillation of the mass is f. If both k1 and k2 are
(A) First increase and then decrease to the original made four times their original values, the frequency
value of oscillation becomes [AIEEE 2007]
(B) first decrease and then increase to the original K1 K2

value m
(C) remain unchanged
(A) f/2 (B) f/4
(D) increase towards a saturation value
(C) 4f (D) 2f
10. A point masss oscillates along the x-axis according 14. If a spring of stiffness k is cut into two parts A and
to the law x  x 0 cos  ωt   / 4 . If the acceleration B of length lA : lB = 2 : 3, then the stiffness of spring
A is given by [AIEEE 2011]
of the particle is written as a  Acos  ωt  δ  , then
[AIEEE 2007] 5 3k
(A) k (B)
π π 2 5
2
(A) A  x 0 ,δ   (B) A  x 0ω ,δ 
4 4
2k
π 3π (C) (D) k
2
(C) A  x 0ω ,δ  
2
(D) A  x 0ω ,δ  5
4 4
11. If x, v and a denote the displacement, the velocity 15. A wooden cube (density of wood d) of side l floats
and the acceleration of a particle executing, simple in a liquid of density  with its upper and lower
harmonic motion of time period of T, then, which of surfaces horizontal. If the cube is pushed slightly
the following does not change with time?
down and released, it performs simple harmonic
[AIEEE 2009]
motion of period, T. Then T is equal to
aT
(A) a 2T 2  4 π 2 v 2 (B) [AIEEE 2011]
x
aT l ld
(C) aT  2 πv (D) (A) 2  (B) 2 
v   d  g g
12. A mass , attached to a horizontal spring, executes SHM

with amplitude A1. When the mass M passes through l ld
(C) 2  (D) 2    d  g
its mean position then a smaller mass m is placed over dg
it and both of them move together with amplitude A2.
 A1 
The ratio of  A  is– [AIEEE 2011] 16. This question has statement 1 and statement 2 Of
 2
the four choices given after the statement, choose
1/ 2
M m  M  the one that best describes the two statements.
(A) (B)  
M  M m  If two springs S1 and S2 of force contants K1 and
1/ 2
K2, respectively are stretched by the same force, it
 M m  M
is found that more work is done on spring S1 than
(C)   (D)
 M  M m
on spring S2. [AIEEE 2012]
Statement 1 If stretched by the same amount, work
13. Two particles are executing simple harmonic motion done on S1, will be more than that on S2.
of the same amplitude A and frequency  along the
x-axis. Their mean position is separated by distance Statement 2 k1 < k2
X0 (X0 > A). If the maximum separation between (A) Statement 1 is false, Statement 2 is true.
them is (X0+A), the phase difference between their (B) Statement 1 is true, Statement 2 is false.
motion is [AIEEE 2011]
(C) Statement 1 is true, Statement 2 is true Statement
π π 2 is the correct explanation for Statement 1
(A) (B)
3 4 (D) Statement 1 is true, Statement 2 is true,
π π Statement 2 is not the correct explanation of
(C) (D) Statement 1
6 2
17. If a simple pendulum has significant amplitude (up 21. For a simple pendulum, a graph is plotted between
to a factor of 1/e of original) only in the period its kinetic energy (KE) and potential energy (PE)
between t = 0 s to t = s, then  may be called the against its displacement d. Which one of the
average life of the pendulum. When the spherical following represents these correctly ? (graphs are
bob of the pendulum suffers a retardation (due to schematic and not drawn to scale)
viscous drag) proportional to its velocity, with ‘b’ as [JEE Main 2015]
the constant of proportionality, the average life time
E KE E
of the pendulum is (assuming damping is small) in
seconds- [AIEEE-2012] PE
(A) d (B)
1 KE
(A) b (B)
b
PE
2 0.693
(C) (D)
b b E KE E PE
(C) (D)
PE KE
18. The amplitude of damped oscillator decreases to d d
0.9 times its original magnitude in 5s. In another
10s, it will decrease to  times its original magnitude, 22. A particle performs simple harmonic motion with
where  equals [JEE Main 2013] amplitude A. Its speed is troubled at the instant that
(A) 0.7 (B) 0.81 2A
it is at a distance from equilibrium position.
(C) 0.729 (D) 0.6 3
The new amplitude of the motion is :
[AIEEE-2016]
19. A particle moves with simple harmonic
(A) 3A (B) A 3
motion in a straight line. In first  s, after starting
from rest it travels a distance a, and in nest  s it 7A A
(C) (D) 41
travels 2a, in same direction, then : 3 3
(A) Amplitude of motion is 4a
23. A particle is executing simple harmonic motion
(B) Time period of oscillations is 6 with a time period T. At time t=0, it is at its
(C) Amplitude of motion is 3a position of equilibrium. The kinetic energy -
(D) Time period of oscillations is 8 time graph of the particle will look like :
[AIEEE-2017]
[JEE Main 2014]
KE
20. A pendulum made of a uniform wire of cross- (A) O T T T t

sectional area A has time period T. When an 4 2
additional mass M is added to its bob, the time period KE
changes to TM. If the Young's modulus of the
material of the wire is Y then 1/Y is euqal to : (g = (B) O T T T t
gravitational acceleration) [JEE Main 2015] 2
KE
  TM 2  A   T 2  A
(A) 1   T   Mg (B) 1   T   Mg (C) O T t
      M  
KE
 TM  2  A  TM  2  Mg
(C)  T   1 Mg (D)  T   1 A (D) O t
      T T
2
Exercise - 4 | Level-II Previous Year | JEE Advanced
1. A simple pendulum has time period T1. When the Displacement x and y are measured with respect
point of suspension moves vertically up according to the equilibrium position of the block B. The
to the equation y = kt2 where k = 1 m/s2 and ‘t’ is
y
time then the time period of the pendulum is T2 ratio in Figure [JEE’2008]
x
2
 T1 
then   is [JEE’ 2005(Scr)]
 T2 
5 11
(A) (B)
6 10
6 5
(C) (D)
5 4 (A) 4 (B) 2
1 1
(C) (D)
2. A small body attached to one end of a vertically hanging 2 4
spring is performing SHM about it’s mean position
with angular frequency  and amplitude a. If at a height 5. The x–t graph of particle undergoing simple
y* from the mean position the body gets harmonic motion is shown below. The acceleration
detached from the spring, calculate of the particle at t = 4 / 3 s is [JEE’ 2009]
the value of y* so that the height
H attained by the mass is
maximum. The body does not
interact with the spring during it’s
y0
subsequent motion
m
after detachment. (aw2>g).
3 2 – 2
[JEE’ 2005] (A)  cm / s 2 (B) cm / s2
32 32
3. Function x = A sin2 t + B cos2 t + C sin t cos t 2 3 2

(C) cm / s2 (D) –  cm / s2
represents SHM [JEE’ 2006] 32 32
(A) for any value of A, B and C (except C = 0)
(B) if A = – B ; C = 2B, amplitude = |B 2 | 6. The mass M shown in the figure oscillates in simple
(C) if A = B; C = 0 harmonic motion with amplitude A. The amplitude
of the point P is [JEE’ 2009]
(D) if A = B; C = 2B, amplitude = |B|
K1 K2
4. A block (B) is attached to two unstretched springs
P M
S1 and S2 with spring constants k and 4k,
respectively (see figure I). The other ends are
attached to identical supports M1 and M2 not k2 A k2 A
attached to the walls. The springs and supports have (A) k (B) k
2 2
negligible mass. There is no friction anywhere. The
block B is displaced towards wall 1 by a small k1A k 2A
distance x (figure II) and released. The block returns (C) k  k (D) k  k
1 2 1 2
and moves a maximum distance y towards wall 2.
7. A uniform rod of length L and mass M is pivoted at the dimensional analysis. However, the motion of a particle
centre. Its two ends are attached to two springs of can be periodic even when its potential energy
equal spring constants k. The springs are fixed to rigid increases on both sides of x = 0 in a way different
supports as shown in the figure, and the rod is free to from kx2 and its total energy is such that the particle
oscillate in the horizontal plane. The rod is gently does not escape to infinity. Consider a particle of mass
pushed through a small angle  in one direction and m moving on the x-axis. Its potential energy is V(x) =
released. The frequency of oscillation is x4 ( > 0) for |x| near the origin and becomes a
[JEE’ 2009] constant equal to V0 for |x|  X0 (see figure).
[JEE 2010]
1 2k
(A) V(x)
2 M
V0
1 k x
(B) X0
2 M
9. If the total energy of the particle is E, it will perform
1 6k 1 24k periodic motion only if :
(C) (D)
2 M 2 M (A) E < 0 (B) E > 0
(C) V0 > E > 0 (D) E > V0
8. A metal rod of length 'L' and mass 'm' is pivoted at
one end. A thin disk of mass 'M' and radius 'R' (<L) 10. For periodic motion of small amplitude A, the time
is attached at its center to the free end of the rod. period T of this particle is proportional to :
Consider two ways the disc is attached : (case A)
The disc is not free to rotate about its center and m 1 m
(A) A (B)
(case B) the disc is free to rotate about its center.  A 
The rod-disc system performs SHM in vertical plane
after being released from the same displaced  1 
position. which of the following statement(s) is (are) (C) A (D)
m A m
true?
(A) Restoring torque in case A = Restoring torque
11. The acceleration of this particle for |x| > X0 is :
in case B
(A) proportional to V0
(B) Restoring torque in case A < Restoring torque
in case B V0
(C) Angular frequency for case (B) proportional to mX
0
A > Angular frequency for case
B V0
(D) Angular frequency for case (C) proportional to mX 0
A < Angular frequency for case
B (D) Zero
[JEE’ 2011]
12. A point mass is subjected to two simultaneous
sinusoidal displacements in x-direction, x1(t) = A
Paragraph for Question Nos. 9 to 11
When a particle of mass m moves on the x-axis in a  2 
sin t and x2(t) = A sin  t   . Adding a third
potential of the from V(x) = kx2, it performs simple  3 
harmonic motion. The corresponding time period is sinusoidal displacement x3(t) = B sin (t + ) brings
m the mass to a complete rest. The values of B and 
proportional to , as can be seen easily using are : [JEE 2011]
k
3 4 figure. We use the

(A) 2A, (B) A, sign convention in
4 3
which position of
Momentum
5  momentum upwards
(C) 3A, (D) A,
6 3 (or to right) is positive
and downwards (or to
left) is negative.
13. A small block is connected to one end of a massless
spring of un-stretched length 4.9 m. The other end [JEE’ 2012] Position
of the spring (see the figure) is fixed. The system 14. The phase space diagram for a ball thrown vertically
lies on a horizontal frictionless surface. The block up from ground is
is stretched by 0.2 m and released from rest at t =
0. It then executes simple harmonic motion with Momentum Momentum

angular frequency  = rad/s . Simultaneously at
3
(A) (B)
t = 0, a small pebble is projected with speed  from Position Position
point P at an angle of 45° as shown in the figure.

Point P is at a horizontal distance of 10 m from O.
If the pebble hits the block at t = 1s, the value of 
is (take g = 10 m/s2) [JEE-2012]
Z Momentum Momentum
(A) 50 m/s
(B) 51 m/s
(C) (D)
Position Position
(C) 52 m/s 45°
O x
10m P
(D) 53 m/s
Paragraph for Question Nos. 14 to 16

Phase space diagrams are useful tools in analyzing 15. The phase space diagram for simple harmonic
all kinds of dynamical problems. They are especially motion is a circle centered at the origin. In the figure,
useful in studying the changes in motion as initial the two circles represent the same oscillator but
position and momentum are changed. Here we for different initial conditions,
consider some simple dynamical systems in one- and E1 and E2 are the total
dimension. For such systems, phase space is a plane mechanical energies Momentum
in which position is plotted along horizontal axis and
respectively. Then
momentum is plotted along vertical axis. The phase E1
E2
space diagram is x(t) vs. p(t) curve in this plane. (A) E1 = 2 E2
2a
The arrow on the curve idicates the time flow. For (B) E1 =2E2 a position
example, the phase space diagram for a particle
(C) E1 = 4E2
moving with constant velocity is a straight
(D) E1 = 15E2
line as shown in the
16. Consider the spring-mass system, with the mass 18. Two independent harmonic oscillators of equal mass
submerged in water, as shown in the figure. The are oscillating about the origin with angular
phase space diagram for one cycle of this system is frequencies 1 and 2 and have total energies E1
and E2, respectively. The variations of their moments
p with positions x are shown in the figures. If a/b =
n2 and a/R = n, then the correct equation(s) is (are)
[JEE Advance 2015]
p
Energy=E1
Momentum
Momentum b
x
a
(A) Position
(B) Position
2 2
(A) E12 = E22 (B)   n
Momentum 1
E1 E 2
(C) 12 = n2 (D)   
(C) (D) Position 1 2
19. A block with mass M is connected by a massless

spring with stiffness constant k to a rigid wall and
17. A particle of mass m is attached to one end of a moves without friction on a horizontal surface. The
mass-less spring of force constant k, lying on a block oscillates with small amplitude A about an
frictionless horizontal plane. The other end of the equilibrium position x0 . Consider two cases: (i)
spring is fixed. The particle starts moving horizontally when the block is at x0; and (ii) when the block is at
from its equilibrium position at time t= 0 with an x = x0 + A. In both the cases, a particle with mass
initial velocity u0. When the speed of the particle of m(<M) is softly placed on the block after which
0.5 u0, it collides elastically with a rigid wall. After they stick to each other. Which of the following
this collision. [JEE Advance-2013] statements (s) is (are) true about the motion after
the mass m is placed on the Mass M ?
(A) the speed of the particle when it returns to its
equilibrium position is u0. (A) The amplitude of oscillation in the first case
(B) the time at which the particle passes through M
changes by a factor of , whereas in the
m+M
m
the equilibrium position for the first time is t = 
k second case it remains unchanged [JEE-2016]
(C) the time at which the maximum compression (B) The final time period of oscillation in both the
case is same
4 m
of the spring occurs is t  (C) The total energy decreases in both the cases
3 k
(D) The instantaneous speed at x0 of the combined
(D) the time at which the particle passes through masses decreases in both the cases
the equilibrium position for the second time is
5 m
t .
3 k

1. A 2. C 3. A 4. C 5. B
6. C 7. B 8. B 9. A 10. A
11. A 12. C 13. B 14. C 15. D
16. C 17. B 18. A 19. C 20. C
21. C 22. D 23. B 24. C 25. A
26. B 27. B 28. D 29. C 30. A
31. C 32. A 33. D 34. D 35. C
36. A 37. C 38. D 39. D 40. C
41. A 42. C 43. B 44. D
1. C 2. C 3. C 4. A 5. D
6. A 7. A 8. B 9. B 10. D
11. D 12. D 13. D 14. C 15. B
16. C 17. A 18. C 19. A 20. A
21. A 22. B 23. C 24. C 25. D
26. B 27. C 28. C 29. D 30. C
31. A 32. A 33. A 34. B 35. C
36. B 37. B 38. C 39. C 40. A
41. B

1. B,C,D 2. B,C,D 3. A,B,C 4. A,B,C 5. A,B
6. B,D 7. B,C,D 8. A,B,C 9. A,C 10. B,C
11. A,C 12. C,D 13. B,C 14. A,C
15. A,B,C,D
1. Amplitude = 5 m ; Initial Phase = /6; Maximum speed = 5m/sec
2. (a) 2.0 cm, /50 sec, 100 N/m ; (b) 1 cm, 3 m / sec , 100 m/sec–1
  
3. (a) sec. , (b) sec. (c) sec. 4. 2m/sec
120 30 30
11  11
5. (a) m (b) sec (c) x = 0.2 – cos t 6. (i) x0 = 2m (ii) T = 2 sec (iii) 2 3
5 5 5
5
7. 25 2 N 8. X = 10 sin (t + /6) 9. Hz , 5 cm
2
 
10. (a) sec , (b) 4 cm, (c) 2.40 kg m/sec 11.
10 7
F(K 2  K 3 ) 1 K 1K 2  K 2K 3  K 3K 1
12. K 1K 2  K 2K 3  K 3K 1 , 2 M (K 2  K 3 ) 13. 1m 14. (i) 2T0, (ii) 3 g upwards
   17L 3
15. (a) 2 a  g , (b) 2 g – a , (c) 2 16. 2
18 g 17. sec
0 0 g 2
3 5 –1  1 
18. A , tan  
8 2
1 
1. y = 0.1 sin (4t +/4) 2. 65 m / s 3.
2 
1 1 2 1
4. 1.8 a 5. 6. 10 6 cm , sin –1 – sec
3  3 6
7. 3cm, x = 10 – 3 sin 5t; E = 0.135 J 8. 0.8t + 0.12 sin 10t
2mg  M  m  ab 1 2mg
9. (a) K= ; (c)   ,
b–a m  b – a 2 (b – a)(M  m)
1 2
10. f= ; E = 42 × 10–5 J; v =2 × 10–2 m/s 11. (a) 2 sec. (b) T = sec.
 51/ 4
1  (P0  mg / A ) A
12. 1m 13. 0.06 m 14. f 
2 mh
15. a 7/4

1. B 2. A 3. B 4. A 5. A
6. A 7. A 8. A 9. D 10. D
11. B 12. C 13. A 14. A 15. B
16. A 17. C 18. C 19. B 20. C
21. D 22. C 23. A

mg g
1. C 2. y* =  2 <a 3. A,B,D 4. C
k 
5. D 6. D 7. C 8. A,D 9. C
10. B 11. D 12. B 13. A 14. D
15. C 16. B 17. A,D 18. B,D 19. A,B,D
WAVES 2.1
WAVES
CHAPTER
2
Section A – Euqation of Wave, Particle 2. Non Mechanical waves : These are electro
Velocity and Acceleration magnetic waves. The electromagnetic waves do not
require a medium for propagation. Its speed in
1. WAVES : vacuum is a universal constant. The motion of the
Waves is distributed energy or distributed electromagnetic waves in a medium depends on the
"disturbance (force)" electromagnetic properties of the medium.
• Following points regarding waves :
(i) The disturbance (force) is transmitted from one point (i) Transverse waves
to another. If the disturbance travels in the x direction but the
(ii) The energy is transmitted from one point to another. particles move in a direction, perpendicular to the x
(iii) The energy or distrubance passes in the form of axis as the wave passes it is called a transverse waves.
wave without any net displacement of medium.
y v
(iv) The oscillatory motion of preceding particle is T
imparted to the adjacent particle following it. T
(v) We need to keep creating disturbance in order to 2Tsin
propagate wave (energy or disturbance) continuously.
x
(a) Waves classification y
The waves are classified under two high level
V
T T
headings : O x
1. Mechanical waves : The motion of the particle
constituting the medium follows mechanical laws i.e.
Newton's laws of motion. Mechanical waves figure - I
originate from a distrubance in the medium (such as
a stone dropping in a pond) and the disturbance Consider a sinusoidal harmonic wave travelling
propagates through the medium. The force between through a string and the motion of a particle as shown
the atoms in the medium are responsible for the in the figure Ist (only one unit of wave shown for
propagation of mechanical waves. Each atom exerts illustration purpose). Since the particle is displaced
a force on the atoms near it, and through this force from its natural (mean) position, the tension in the
the motion of the atom is transmitted to the others. string arising from the deformation tends to restore
The atoms in the medium do not experience any net
the position of the particle. On the other hand,
displacement.
velocity of the particle (kinetic energy) move the
Mechanical waves is further classified in two particle farther is zero. Therefore, the particle is
categories such that
pulled down due to tension towards mean position.
1. Transverse waves (waves on a string) In the process, it acquires kinetic energy (greater
2. Longitudnal waves (sound waves) speed) and overshoots the mean position in the
downward direction. The cycle of restoration of
position continues as vibration (oscillation) of particle The vibration and wave motion are at right angle to
takes place. each other.
Three position along x-axis named "1", "2" and "3"
(ii) Longitudinal waves
are marked with three vertical dotted lines. At either
Longitudinal waves are characterized by the direction of two instants as shown, the positions of string
of vibration (disturbance) and wave motion. They particles have different displacements from the
are along the same direction. It is clear that vibration undisturbed position on horizontal x-axis. We can
in the same direction needs to be associated with a conclude from this observation that displacement in
"restoring" mechanism in the longitudinal direction. y-direction is a function of positions of particle in
x-direction. As such, the displacement of a particle
(b) Mathematical description of waves
constituting the string is a function of "x".
We shall attempt here to evolve a mathematical
Let us now observe the positions of a given particle,
model of a travelling transverse wave. For this, we
say "1". It has certain positive displacement at time
choose a specific set up of string and associated
t = t, At the next snapshot at t = t + t, the
transverse wave travelling through it. The string is
displacement has reduced to zero. The particle at
tied to a fixed end, while disturbance is imparted at
"2" has maximum displacement at t = t, but the same
the free end by up and down motion. For our
has reduced at t = t + t. The third particle at "3'
purpose, we consider that pulse is small in dimension;
has certain positive displacement at t = t, At t = t + t,
the string is light, elastic and homogeneous. The
it acquires additional positive displacement and
assumptions are required as we visualize a small
reaches the position of maximum displacement.
travelling pulse which remains undiminished when
From these observation, we conclude that
it moves through the strings. We also assume that
displacement of a particle at any position along the
the string is long enough so that our observation is
string is a function of "t".
not subjected to pulse reflected at the fixed end.
Combining two observations, we conclude that
For understanding purpose, we first consider a single
displacment of a particle is a function of both position
pulse as shown in the figure (irrespective of whether
of the particle along the string and time.
we can realize such pulse in practice or not). Our
objective here is to determine the nature of a y = f (x, t)
mathematical description which will enable us to We can further specify the nature of the mathematical
determine displacement (disturbance) of string as function by association the speed of the wave in our
pulse passes through it. We visualize two snap shots consideration. Let "v" be the constant speed with
of the travelling pulse at two close time instants "t" which wave travels from the left end to the right
and "t + t". The single pulse is moving towards end. We notice that wave function at a given position
right in the positive x-direction. of the string is a function of time only as we are
considering displacement at a particular value of "x".
Let us consider left hand end of the string as the
Y 12 3 origin of reference (x = 0 and t = 0). The displacement
in y-direction (disturbance) at x = 0 is a function of
t=t
x time, "t" only :
O
y = f(t) = A sin t
The disturbance travels to the right at constant speed
t  t  t "v'. Let it reaches a point specified as x = x after
O x
time "t". If we visualize to describe the origin of this
disturbance at x = 0, then time elapsed for the
distrubance to move from the origin (x = 0) to the
WAVES 2.3
point (x = x) is "x/v". Therefore, if we want to use

the function of displacement at x = 0 as given above, One wavelength

then we need to subtract the time elapsed and set A
Displacement
the equation is :
O
 x  x Distance x
y  f  t –   A sin   t – 
 v   v B
This can also be expressed as

Crest Trough Crest Trough
 vt – x   x – vt 
 f   –f   The wavelength  of a wave is generally taken as
 v   v 
the distance between two successive crests or two
y(x, t) = g(x – vt)
successive trough. To be more specific, it is the
using any fixed value of t (i.e. at any instant), this distance between two consecutive points on the wave
shows shape of the string. which have same phase.
If the wave is travelling in –x direction, the wave A displacement-time graph may also be drawn for a
equation is written as wave motion, showing how the displacement of one
x particle at a particular distance from the source varies
y (x, t) = f (t  )
v with time. If this is simple harmonic variation then
The quantity x – vt is called phase of the wave the graph is a sine curve.
function. As phase of the pulse has fixed value
x – vt = const. • Wave Length, Frequency, Speed
dx If the source of a wave makes f vibrations per second,
Taking the derivative w.r.t. time v
dt so they will the particles of the transmitting medium.
where v is the phase velocity although often called That is, the frequency of the waves equals frequency
wave velocity. It is the velocity at which a particular of the source.
phase of the distrubance travels through space. When the source makes one complete vibration, one
In order for the function to represent a wave wave is generated and the disturbance spreads out a
travelling at speed v, the quantities x, v and t must distance  from the source. If the source continues
appear in the combination (x + vt) or (x – vt). Thus to vibrate with constant frequency f, then f waves
(x – vt)2 is acceptable but x2 – v2 t2 is not. will be produced per second and the wave advances
a distance f  in one second. If v is the wave speed
then
(c) Describing Waves :
v=f 
Two kinds of graph may be drawn displacement -
distance and displacement-time. This relationship holds for all wave motions.
A displacement-distance graph for a transverse Frequency depends on source (not on medium), v

mechanical waves shows the displacement y of the depends on medium (not on source frequency), but
vibrating particles of the transmitting medium at wavelength depend on both medium and source.
different distance x from the source at a certain
instant i.e. it is like a photograph showing shape of
(d) Initial Phase :
the wave at that particular instant.
At x = 0 and t = 0, the sine function evaluates to
The maximum displacement of each particle from
zero and as such y-displacement is zero. However,
its undisturbed position is the amplutude of the wave.
a wave form can be such that y-displacement is
In the figure 1, it OA or OB.
not zero at x =0 and t = 0. In such case, we need to
account for the displacement by introducting an

A 1
angle like :  Asin   sin =
2 2
y(x,t) = Asin (kx – t + )
where "" is initial phase. At x = 0 and t = 0.  3
= ,
y(0, 0) = A sin () 4 4
The measurement of angle determines following two To choose the correct phase angle  we displaced
aspects of wave form at x = 0, t = 0 : (i) whether to wave. Slightly in +ve x direction such that
the displacement is positive or negative and (ii)
whether wave form has positive or negative slope.
a
For a harmonic wave represented by sine function,
b
there are two values of initial phase angle for which
displacement at reference origin (x = 0, t = 0) is
positive and has equal magnitude. We know that
the sine values of angles in first and second quadrants
are positive. A pair of initial phase angles, say  = /3 In above figure Paticle at a is move downward
and 2/3, correspond to equal positive sine values
A
are : towards point b i.e. particle at x = 0 & y =
2
sin = sin ( – )
have negative velocity which gives
    2  1
sin  sin   –   sin    y
3  3  3  2  A cos( – kx  ) at
t
To choose the initial phase in between the two values
t = 0, x = 0
2
/3 & . We can look at a wave motion in yet is cos = – ve (from figure) ...(2)
3
from above discussion 3/4 gives sin + ve and cos
another way. A wave form at an instant is displaced
negative i.e.
by a distance x in very small time interval t then
then speed to the particle at t = 0 & x = 0 is in 3

upward +ve direction in further time t 4
v
Note
(0,0)
v
 x
at time t y  A sin  t  
 v
EXAMPLE 1
Find out the expression of wave equation which is moving y  A sint
x
A
is +ve x direction and at x = 0, t = 0 y =
2 y = A sin ( t + kx + )
Sol. Let y = A sin (t – kx + )
at t = 0 and x = 0
WAVES 2.5
EXAMPLE 2 Which of the two forms is correct ? In fact, both

are correct so long we are in a position to accurately
If (t) & (kx) terms have same sign then the wave
interpret the equation. Starting with the first equation
move toward –ve x direction and vice versa and
and using trigonometric identity :
with diffierent initial phase.
We have,
y = A sin (wt – kx) Wave move toward  A sin (kx – t) = A sin ( – kx + t)
y = A sin (–kx + wt) +ve x direction
= A sin (t – kx + )
y = A sin (–kx – wt) Thus we see that two forms represent waves along
= A sin (kx + wt + p) Wave move toward
–ve x direction  
y = A sin (kx + wt) at the same speed  v   . They differ, however,,
 k
2. PAR TICL E VE LOCITY AND in phase. There is phase difference of "". This has
ACCELERATION : implication on the waveform and the manner particle
Particle velocity at a given position x = x is obtained oscillates at any given time instant and position. Let
by differentiating wave function with respect to time us consider two waveforms at x = 0, t = 0. The
"t". We need to differentiate equation by treating slopes of the waveforms are :
"x" as constant. The partial differentiation yields

particle velocity as : y(x, t)  kA cos(kx – t) = kA
x
  = a positive number and
vp=  t y(x,t)   t Asin(kx – t) = –A cos (kx – t)

y(x, t)  –kA cos( t – kx) = –kA
We can use the property of cosine function to find x
the maximum velocity. We obtain maximum speed
= a negative number
when cosine function evaluates to "–1" :
 vpmax = A
Forms of wave functions
The acceleration of the particle is obtained by
differentiating expression of velocity partially with y
v
respect to time :
y  A sin[kx – t]
 
 ap = v p  {– A cos(kx – t)}
t t x
O
vp
= –2 A sin (kx – t) = –2y
y  A sin[t – kx]
Again the maximum value of the acceleration can vp
be obtained using property of sine function : x
O
 apmax = 2A
3. DIFFER ENT FOR MS OF WAVE Exchange of terms in the argument of sine function
FUNCTION : results in a phase difference of .
Different forms give rise to bit of confusion about In the first case, the slope is positive and hence particle
the form of wave function. The forms used for velocity is negative. It means particle is moving from
describing wave are : reference origin or mean position to negative
y (x, t) = A sin (kx – t) extreme position. In the second case, the slope is
negative and hence particle velocity is positive. It
y(x, t) = A sin (t – kx + )
means particle is moving from positive extreme The transverse velocity and transverse acceleration
position to reference origin or mean position. Thus of any point on the string do not reach their
two forms represent waves which differ in direction maximum value simultaneously. Infact, the
in which particle is moving at a given position. transverse velocity reaches its maximum value
Once we select the appropriate wave form, we can (A) when the displacement y = 0, whereas the
write wave equation in other forms as given here : transverse acceleration reaches its maximum
magnitudes (2A) when y = ± A
 t  further
y(x, t) = A sin (kx – t) = A sin k  x –  = A sin
 k 
 dy 
2  dx 
(x – vt) t cons tan t

Further, substituting for "k" and "" in wave equation, y
 = – kA cos (wt – kx + ) ...(3)
we have : x
 2 2  x t   2y
y (x, t) = A sin  x – t   A sin 2   –  = = – k2A sin (t – kx + )
  T   T x 2
If we want to represent waveform moving in ...(4)

negative "x" direction, then we need to replace "t" From (1) and (3)
by "–t".
y  y
–
t k x
4. THE LINEAR WAVE EQUATION :
 vp = – vw × slope
By using wave function y = A sin (t – kx + ), we
i.e. if the slope at any point is negative, particle
can describe the motion of any point on the string.
velocity and vice-versa, for a wave moving along
Any point on the string moves only vertically, and
positive
so its x coordinate remains constant. The transverse
x axis i.e. vw is positive.
velocity v y of the point and its transverse
y
acceleration ay are therefore.
A
B
 dy 
vy   
 dt  x cons tan t x1 x2
x
y
  t = A cos (t – kx + ) ...(1)
For example, consider two points A and B on the
 dv  y-curve for a wave, as shown. The wave is moving
ay   y  along positive x-axis.
 dt  x cons tan t
Slope at A is positive therefore at the given moment,
 vy 2 its velocity is negative. That means it is coming
 y
  = –2A sin (t – kx + ) ..(2) downward. Reverse is the situation for particle at
t  t2
point B.
and hence Now using equation (2) and (4)
vy. max = A
 2y k 2  2y  2y 1 2 y
ay.max = 2A 2
 2 2  
x  t x 2 v 2 t 2
WAVES 2.7
This is known as the linear wave equation or Comparing with linear wave equation, we see that
diffential equation representation of the travelling the wave function is a solution to the linear wave
wave model. We have developed the linear wave equation if the speed at which the pulse moves is 3
equation from a sinusoidal mechanical wave cm/s. It is apparent from wave function therefore
travelling through a medium. But it is much more it is a solution to the linear wave equation.
general. The linear wave equation successfully
describes waves on strings, sound waves and also
EXAMPLE 4
electromagnetic waves.
A wave pulse is travelling on a string at 2 m/s.
Thus, the above equation can be written as,
displacement y of the particle at x = 0 at any time t
2 y 2 y is given by
2
 v2 2 ...(i)
t x
2
y
The general solution of this equation is of the form t2  1
y(x, t) = f (ax ± bt) ...(ii) Find
Thus, any function of x and t which satisfies Eq. (i) (i) Expression of the function y = (x, t) i.e.,
or which can be written as Eq. (ii) represents a displacement of a particle position x and time t.
wave. The only condition is that it should be finite
(ii) Shape of the pulse at t = 0 and t = 1s.
everywhere and at all times. Further, if these
conditions are satisfied, then speed of wave (v) is  x
given by, Sol. (i) By replacing t by  t –  , we can get the desired
 v
coefficient of t b wave function i.e.,
v 
coefficient of x a
Thus plus (+) sign between ax and bt implies that 2
y 2
the wave is travelling along negative x-direction and  x
 t –  1
minus (–) sign shows that it is travelling along  2
positive x-direction.
(ii) We can use wave function at a particular instant,
say t = 0, to find shape of the wave pulse using
EXAMPLE 3
different values of x.
Verify that wave function
2 2
y at t=0 y 2
(x – 3t)2  1 x
1
is a solution to the linear wave equation x and y are 4
in cm.
at x=0 y=2
Sol. By taking partial derivatives of this function w.r.t x
x=2 y=1
and to t.
 2 y 12(x – 3t)2 – 4 Y
 , and 2
x 2 [(x – 3t) 2  1]3
 2 y 108(x – 3t) 2 – 36 1

 t2 [(x – 3t)2  1]3
–2 0 –2 –4
–4
 2 y 1  2x
or 
 x2 9  t2
x=–2 y=1 EXAMPLE 5

x=4 y = 0.4 A sinusoidal wave travelling in the positive x
x = –4 y = 0.4 direction has an amplitude of 15 cm, wavelength 40
Using these value, shape is drawn. cm and frequency 8 Hz. The vertical displacement of
the medium at t =0 and x = 0 is also 15 cm, as shown
Similarly for t = 1s, shape can drawn. What do you
conclude about direction of motion of the wave from y(cm)
the graphs? Also check how much the pulse has 40
move in 1s time interval. This is equal to wave
15
speed. Here is the procedure.
x(cm)
2
y 2
 x at t = 1s
1 –   1
 2 (a) Find the angular wave number, period angular
frquency and speed of the wave.
at x=2 y = 2(maximum value)
(b) Determine the phase constant , and write a
at x=0 y=1
general expression for the wave function.
at x=4 y=1
2 2 rad 
Y Sol. (a) k    rad / cm
 40cm 20
2
1 1
t=1 T  s  = 2 f = 16 s–1
t=0
f 8
1
v = f  = 320 cm/s
(b) It is given that A = 15 cm
x
0
–2 2 4 6 and also y = 15 cm at x = 0 and t = 0
then using y = A sin (t – kx + )
The pulse has moved to the right by 2 units in 1 s 15 = 15 sin   sin  = 1
interval. Therefore, the wave function is
x 
Also as t – = constt. y = A sin (t – kx + )
2 2
Differentiating w.r.t time
   rad  
 (15cm)sin (16s – )t –   .x  
1 dx dx   20 cm  2
1–  0  2
2 dt dt
WAVES 2.9
Section B – Speed of transverse wave on segment of length l moves to the left with speed
string, energy in waves v. The net force on the segment is in the radial
direction because the horizontal components of the
1. SPEED OF A TRANSVERSE WAVE ON tension force cancel.
A STRING
Consider a pulse travelling along a string with a
 F  2T sin   2T
r
speed v to the right. If the amplitude of the pulse is Where we have used the approximation sin   
small compared to the length of the string, the tension for small .
T will be approximately constant along the string. If  is the mass per unit length of the string, the
In the reference frame moving with speed v to the mass of the segment of length l is
right, the pulse in stationary and the string moves m =  l = 2R (as  l = 2R)
with a speed v to the left. Figure shows a small mv 2
segment of the string of length l. This segment From Newton's second law  Fr = ma =
R
forms part of a circular arc of radius R.
Instantaneously the segment is moving with speed v  v2 
or 2T = (2R)  R 
in a circular path, so it has centripetal acceleration  
v2/R. The forces acting on the segment are the
tension T at each end. The horizontal component T
 v
of these forces are equal and opposite and thus 
cancel. The vertical component of these forces point
radially inward towards the centre of the circular.
arc. These radial forces provide centripetal EXAMPLE 6
acceleration. Let the angle substended by the Find speed of the wave generated in the string as in
the situation shown. Assume that the tension in not
segment at centre be 2. The net radial force acting
affected by the mass of the cord.
on the segment is
v
l v2
ar  l 500 gm/m
R v
 
R T T
20 kg
R  
O Sol. T = 20 × 10 = 200 N
v O
(b)
(a) 200
v  20m / s
0.5
Fig. (a) To obtain the speed v of a wave on a

stretched string. It is convenient to describe the EXAMPLE 7
motion of a small segment of the string in a moving A taut string having tension 100 N and linear mass
frame of reference. density 0.25 kg/m is used inside a cart to generate a
Fig. (b) In the moving frame of reference, the small wave pulse starting at the left end, as shown. What
should be the velocity of the cart so that pulse EXAMPLE 9

remains stationary w.r.t ground.
A uniform rope of mass 0.1 kg and length 2.45 m
hangs from a ceiling
(a) Find the speed of transverse wave in the rope at
a point 0.5 m distant from the lower end.
(b) Calculate the time taken by a transverse wave to
travel the full length of the rope.
Sol. (a) As the string has mass and it is suspended
T vertically, tension in it will be different at different
Sol. Velocity of pulse =  20m / s

points. For a point at a distance x from the free end,
   tension will be due to the weight of the string below
Now v PG  v PC  v CG
it. So, if m is the mass of string of length l, the mass

0 = 20 î  v CG
m
 of length x of the string will be,   x.
VCG  –20 iˆ m / s  l 
m m 
 T    xg  xg   
EXAMPLE 8  l   l 
One end of 12.0 m long rubber tube with a total
mass of 0.9 kg is fastened to a fixed support. A cord T
attached to the other and passes over a pulley and   xg

supports an object with a mass of 5.0 kg. The tube
is struck a transverse blow at one end. Find the time
T
required for the pulse to reach the other end (g = 9.8 or v  xg ...(i)

m/s2)

Sol. Tension in the rubber tube AB, T = mg At x = 0.5 m, x
T = (5.0) (9.8) = 49 N
v  0.5  9.8 = 2.21 m/s
or
Mass per unit length of rubber tube, (b) From Eq. (i) we see that velocity of the wave is
different at different points. So, if at point x the
0.9 wave travels a distance dx in time dt, then
= = 0.075 kg/m B
12
m
dx dx
dt  
A v gx
 Speed of wave on the tube,
T 49 t l
v   25.56 m / s dx
 0.075   dt  
0 0 gx
 The required time is,
AB 12 l 2.45
t   0.47s or t2 2 = 1.0 s Ans.
v 25.56 g 9.8
WAVES 2.11
2. ENERGY CALCULATION IN WAVES :

dx
i.e. . Hence,
dt
(a) Kinetic energy per unit length
The velocity of string element in transverse direction dK 1
 v2 A2 cos2 (kx – t)
is greatest at mean position and zero at the extreme dt 2
positions of waveform. We can find expression of Here kinetic energy is a periodic function. We can
transverse velocity by differentiating displacement obtain average rate of transmission of kinetic energy
with respect to time. Now, the y-displacement is by integrating the expression for integral wavelengths.
given by : Since only cos2(kx – t) is the varying entity, we
y = A sin (kx – t) need to find average of this quantity only. Its
Differentiating partially with respect to time, the integration over intergal wavelengths give a value
expression of particle velocity is : 1
of " " . Hence, average rate of transmission of
y 2
vp  = – A cos (kx – t)
t kinetic energy is :
In order to calculate kinetic energy, we consider a dK 1 1 1

|avg   v2 A2  v2 A 2
small string element of length "dx" having mass per dt 2 2 4
unit length "". The kinetic energy of the element is
given by :
(b) Elastic potential energy
1 1 The elastic potential energy of the string element
dK  dmv 2p  dx2 A 2 cos2 (kx – t)
2 2 results as string element is stretched during its
oscillation. The extension or stretching is maximum
This is the kinetic energy associated with the element at mean position. We can see in the figure that the
in motion. Since it involves squared of cosine length of string element of equal x-length "dx" is
function, its value is greatest for a phase of zero greater at mean position than at the extreme. As a
matter of fact, the elongation depends on the slope
 of the curve. Greater the slope, greater is the
(mean position) and zero for a phase of elongation. The string has the least length when slope
2
is zero. For illustration purpose, the curve is
(maximum displacement). purposely drawn in such a manner that the
elongation of string element at mean position is
Now, we get kinetic energy per unit length, "KL", highlighted.
by dividing this expression with the length of small
y
string considered : V
dK 1 2 2 t=t
KL    A cos2 (kx – t)
dx 2
x
O
• Rate of transmission of kinetic
energy
The rate, at which kinetic energy is transmitted, is
obtained by dividing expression of kinetic energy by t  t  t
vp
small time element, "dt" : x
O
dK 1 dx 2 2
   A cos 2 (kx – t)
dt 2 dt
fig : The string element stretched most at
But, wave or phase speed, v, is time rate of position
equilibrium position
Greater extension of string element corresponds to • Rate of transmission of elastic potential energy
greater elastic energy. As such, it is greatest at mean The rate, at which elastic potential energy is
position and zero at extreme position. This deduction transmitted, is obtained by dividing expression of
in contrary to the case of SHM in which potential kinetic energy by small time element, "dt". This
energy is greatest at extreme position and zero at expression is same as that for kinetic enegy.
mean position.
dU 1
• Potential energy per unit length  v2 A2 cos2 (kx – t)
dt 2
When the string segment is stretched from the length
dx to the length ds an amount of work = T (ds – dx) and average rate of transmission of elastic potential
is done. This is equal to the potential energy stored energy is :
in the stretched string segment. So the potential
energy in this case is : dU 1 1 1
|avg   v2 A2  v2 A 2
dt 2 2 4
ds
dy
(c) Mechanical energy per unit length
Since the expression elastic potential energy is same
as that of kinetic energy, we get mechanical energy
expression by multiplying expression of kinetic
energy by "2". The mechanical energy associated
x x + dx
with small string element, "dx", is :
U = T (ds – dx)
1 2
Now ds  (dx 2  dy 2 ) dE = 2xdK = 2x dmv p = dx2A2cos2 (kx – t)
2
  dy  2  Similarly, the mechanical energy per unit length is :

 dx 1    
  dx   dE 1
EL   2x 2 A 2 cos2 (kx – t)
from the binomial expansion dx 2
2 = 2 A2 cos2 (kx – t)

1  dy 
so ds  dx +   dx
2  dx 
(d) Average power transmitted
2
1 y The average power transmitted by wave is equal
U = T (ds – dx)  T   dx
2  x  to time rate of transmission of mechanical energy
or the potential energy density over integral wavelengths. It is equal to :
2 dE 1 1
dU 1   y  Pavg  |avg  2  v2 A2  v2 A 2
 T  ...(i) dt 4 2
dx 2   x 
If mass of the string is given in terms of mass per
dy unit volume, "", then we make appropriate change
= kAcos (kx – t)
dx in the derivation. We exchange "" by "s" where
and T = v2  "s" is the cross section of the string :
Put above value in equation (i) then we get
1
Pavg  sv2 A2
dU 1 2 2 2
  A cos2 (kx – t)
dx 2
WAVES 2.13
(e) Energy density Ph ase differen ce betwe en t wo

Since there is no loss of energy involved, it is particles in the same wave :
expected that energy per unit length is uniform The general expression for a sinusoidal wave
throughout the string. As much energy enters that travelling in the positive x direction is
much energy goes out for a given length of string. y(x, t) = A sin (t – kx)
n
This average value along unit length of the string Eq of Particle at x 1 is given by y1 = A sin
length is equal to the average rate at which energy (t – kx1)
is being transferred. Eqn of particle which is at x2 from the origin
The average mechanical energy per unit length is y2 = Asin (t – kx2)
equal to integration of expression over integral Phase difference between particles is k(x2 – x1) =
wavelength 

1 1 2 2 Kx =  x 
EL|avg = 2x v2 A2 = v A k
4 2
We have derived this expression for harmonic wave Note

along a string. The concept, however, can be
extended to two or three dimensional transverse
waves. In the case of three dimensional transverse
waves, we consider small volumetric element. We, Section C – Super position principle interfer-
then, use density, , in place of mass per unit length, ence of waves
. The corresponding average energy per unit
volume is referred as energy density (u) : 1. PRINCIPLE OF SUPERPOSITION :
1 This principle defines the displacement of a medium

u vw 2 A 2
2 particle when it is oscillating under the influence of
two or more than two waves. The principle of
(f) Intensity
superposition is stated as :
Intensity of wave (I) is defined as power transmitted
"When two or more waves superpose on a medium
per unit cross section area of the medium :
particle than the resultant displacement of that
A2 1 medium particle is given by the vector sum of the
I  sv2  vw 2 A 2 individual displacements produced by the component
2s 2
waves at that medium particle independently."
Intensity of wave (I) is a very useful concept for
  
three dimensional waves radiating in all direction Let y 1 , y 2 ,....... y N are the displacements
from the source. This quantity is usually referred in produced by N independent waves at a medium
the context of light waves, which is transverse particle in absence of others then the displacemnt
harmonic wave in three dimensions. Intensity is of that medium, when all the waves are superposed
defined as the power transmitted per unit cross at that point, is given as
sectional area. Since light spreads uniformly all     
around, intensity is equal to power transmitted, y  y 1  y 2  y 3  .......  y N
divided by spherical surface drawn at that point with If all the waves are producing oscillations at that
source at its center. point are collinear then the displacement of the
medium particle where superposition is taking place

can be simply given by the algebric sum of the v
individual displacement. Thus we have
y = y1 + y2 + ..............+yN
The above equation is valid only if all individual v
displacements y1, y2 ........... yN are along same
straight line.
(a) Applic atio ns of Principle of
A simple example of superposition can be
Superposition of Waves
understood by figure shown. Suppose two wave
There are several different phenomenon which
pulses are travelling simultaneously in opposite
takes place during superposition of two or more
directions as shown. When they overlap each other
wave depending on the wave characteristics which
the displacement of particle on string is the algebric
are being superposed. We'll discuss some standard
sum of the two displacement as the displacements
phenomenons, and these are :
of the two pulses are in same direction. Figure
(1) Interference of Wave
shown (b) also shows the similar situation when
the wave pulses are in opposite side. (2) Stationary Waves
y (3) Beats
v
y2
v
(4) Lissajou's Figures (Not discussed here in detail.)
y1 y2
y1 Lets discuss these in detail.
x
(b) Interference of Waves
y
v Suppose two sinusoidal waves of same wavelength
and amplitude travel in same direction along the same
y2 straight line (may be on a stretched string) then
y1 x
superposition principle can be used to define the
v resultant displacement of every medium particle.
y The resultant wave in the medium depends on the
v
y2 extent to which the waves are in phase with respect
v
y1 y2 to each other, that is, how much one wave form is
y1
x shifted from the other waveform. If the two waves
y are exactly in same phase, that is the shape of one
v
wave exactly fits on to the other wave then they
y2 combine to double the displacement of every
y1 x medium particle as shown in figure (a). This
v phenomenon we call as constructive interference.
If the superposing waves are exactly out of phase
y1 + y2 or in opposite phase then they combine to cancel all
v
the displacements at every medium particle and
v
medium remains in the form of a straight line as
shown in figure (b)
WAVES 2.15
y y
Wave I
x x
–A
(b)
This phenomenon we call destructive interference.

y
Thus we can state that when waves meet, they
A
interfere constructively if they meet in same phase
and destructively if they meet in opposite phase. In
x
either case the wave patterns do not shift relative
–A to each other as they propagates. Such superposing
waves which have same form and wavelength and
have a fixed phase relation to each other, are called
y coherent waves. Sources of coherent waves are
A called coherent source. Two indepedent sources can
never be coherent in nature due to practical
Wave II limitations of manufacturing process. Generally all
x
coherent sources are made either by spliting of the
wave forms of a single source or the different
sources are fed by a single main energy source.
In simple words interference is the
y
phenomenon of superposition of two coherent waves
+A
travelling in same direction.
We've discussed that the resultant
x
displacement of a medium particle when two
–A
coherent waves interfere at that point, as sum or
difference of the individual displacements by the
two waves if they are in same phase (phase
difference = 0, 2, .....) or opposite phase (phase
y difference = , 3,.....) respectively. But the two
2A waves can also meet at a medium particle with
phase difference other then 0 or 2, say if phase
Resultant
x difference  is such that 0 <  < 2, then how is
Wave
the displacement of the point of superposition given
–2A (a)
? Now we discuss the interference of waves in
details analytically.
(c) Analytical Treatment of Interference

2
of Waves x  2n  x = n

For constructive interference

S1
x1 Inet = ( I1  I 2 )2
A1 sin(t  kx) y1  A1 sin(t  kx1)
When I1 = I2 = I
y 2  A 2 sin(t  kx2 )
x2 Inet = 4 I
S2
A 2 sin(t  kx) Anet = A1 + A2
When superposing waves are in opposite phase, the
resultant amplitude is the difference of two
Interference implies super position of waves. amplitudes & Inet is minimum; this is known as
Whenever two or more than two waves destructive interference.
superimpose each other they give sum of their
For Inet to be minimum,
individual diplacement.
cos  = – 1
Let the two waves coming from sources S1 & S2
 = (2n + 1) 
be
where n = {0,1,2,3,4,5...........}
y1 = A1 sin ( t + kx1 )
y2 = A2 sin (t + kx2) respectively. 2
x = (2n + 1) 
Due to superposition 
ynet = y1 + y2

ynet = A1 sin ( t + kx1) + A2 sin (t + kx2)  x = (2n  1)
2
Phase difference between y1 & y2 = k(x2 – x1)
For destructive interfence
i.e.,  = k(x2 – x1)
Inet = ( I1 – I 2 )2
2
As  = x (where x = path
 If I1 = I2
difference &  = phase difference) Inet = 0
Anet = A1 – A2
Anet = A12  A 22  2A1A2 cos 
( I1  I 2 )2
 A net 2  A12  A 22  2A1A 2 cos  Ratio of Imax & Imin =
( I1 – I 2 )2
 Inet = I1 + I2 + 2 I1I 2 cos (as I  A2) Generally,

When the two displacements are in phase, then the
Inet = I1 + I2 + 2 I1I 2 cos
resultant amplitude will be sum of the two amplitude
& Inet will be maximum, this is known of constructive If I1 = I2 = I
interference. Inet = 2I + 2Icos
For Inet to be maximum

cos = 1   = 2n Inet = 2I(1 + cos ) = 4Icos2
2
where n = {0,1,2,3,4,5...........}
WAVES 2.17
EXAMPLE 10 0.5cm 1cm

Wave from two source, each of same frequency 0.5cm 1cm 1cm
1cm 1cm 1cm
+ =
and travelling in same direction, but with intensity 1cm 1cm 1cm 2cm
in the ratio 4 : 1 interfere. Find ratio of maximum to At t = ½ s

minimum intensity. (g) (h) (i)
2
 I1 
2  1 2 1cm
I max  I1  I2  I2    2 1 1cm

1cm
    2cm 1cm
+ =
Sol. I min  I1 – I2   I1   2 –1  = 9 : 1 1cm 2cm 1cm 2cm
 – 1
I2 At t = 2s
  (j) (k) (i)
1
In every s , each pulse (one real moving towards
EXAMPLE 11 2
A triangular pulse moving at 2 cm/s on a rope right and one imaginary moving towards left travels
approaches an end at which it is free to slide on a a distance of 1 cm, as the wave speed is 2 cm/s.)
vertical pole. (b) Particle speed, vp = |– v (slope)|
2 cm/s
1
Here, v = wave speed = 2 cm/s and slope =
2
1 cm
 Particle speed = 1 cm/s Ans.
2 cm 1cm 1cm
EXAMPLE 12
Figure shows a rectanglar pulse and triangular pulse
approaching each other. The pulse speed is 0.5 cm/s.
1 Sketch the resultant pulse at t = 2 s
(a) Draw the pulse at s interval until it is completely
2
reflected.
2cm
(b) What is the particle speed on the trailing edge at
the instant depicted ? –1 0 2 3
–2 1
Sol. (a) Reflection of a pulse from a free boundary is x(cm)
really the superposition of two identical waves Sol. In 2 s each pulse will travel a distance of 1 cm.
travelling in opposite direction. This can be shown The two pulses overlap between 0 and 1 cm as shown
as under. in figure. So, A1 and A2 can be added as shown in
figure (c).
1cm 1cm 1cm
+ =
2cm 1cm 1cm 2cm 2cm 1cm
(a) A1 2cm
At t = ½ S
–1 0 1
(a) (b) (c) + (c) 2cm
A1
(b)
2cm 2cm
A2 A2
2cm 2
1cm 1cm 1cm 0 1 –1 0 1 2
+ =
2cm 1cm 1cm 2cm 2cm 1cm Resultant pluse
at t = 2s
At t = 1 s
Note
(d) (e) (f)
Section D – Reflection and transmission be- Reflection of wave pulse (a) at a fixed end of a string
tween 2 string and (b) at a free end. Time increases from top to
bottom in each figure.
1. REFLECTION AND TRANSMISSION
IN WAVES : When a wave arrives at this free end, the ring slides
the rod. The ring reaches a maximum displacement.
(i) When a pulse travelling along a string reaches the
At this position the ring and string come momentarily
end, it is reflected. If the end is fixed as shown in
to rest as in the fourth drawing from the top in figure
figure (a), the pulse returns inverted. This is bacause
(b). But the string is stretched in this position, giving
as the leading edge reaches the wall, the string pulls increased tension, so the free end of the string is
up the wall. According to Newton's third law, the pulled back down, and again a reflected pulse is
wall will exert an equal and opposite force on the produced, but now the direction of the displacement
string as all instants. This force is therefore, directed is the same as for the initial pulse.
first down and then up. It produces a pulse that is
inverted but otherwise identical to the original. (ii) The formation of the reflected pulse is similar to the
The motion of free end can be studied by letting a overlap of two pulses travelling in opposite directions.
ring at the end of string sliding smoothly on the rod. The net displacement at any point is given by the
The ring and rod maintain the tension but exert no principle of superposition.
transverse force.
(a) (b)
Fig (a) : shows two pulses with the same shape, one inverted
with respect to the other, travelling in opposite
directions. Because these two pulses have the same
shape the net displacement of the point where the
string is attached to the wall is zero at all times.
Fig (b) : shows two pulses with the same shape, travelling in
oppoiste directions but not inverted relative to each
other. Note that at one instant, the displacement of
(a) (b) the free end is double the pulse height.
WAVES 2.19
(iii) REFLECTION AND TRANSMISSION Now to find the relation between Ai, Ar, At we
BETWEEN TWO STRING : consider the figure (b)
Here we are dealing with the case where the end point Incident Power = Reflected Power + Transmitted
is neither completely fixed nor completely free to move Power
As we consider an example where a light string is Pi = Pr + Pt
attached to a heavy string as shown is figure a.
2 2 f 2 A i 21v 1  2 2f 2 A r 21v1  2 2f 2 A t 2 2 v 2 ...(i)
If a wave pulse is produced on a light string moving
towards the friction a part of the wave is reflected and
T T
a part is transmitted on the heavier string the reflected Put 1 = v 2 and 2 = v 2
1 2
wave is inverted with respect to the original one.
in equation (i) their
T
v1 
1
T Ai 2 A r 2 A t 2
v2   
2 v1 v1 v2
(v 2 ,  2 ) v1> v2
( v1, 1 )
v1 2
Ai 2  A r 2  At .......(ii)
y  A i sin(t – k 1x) v2
v2 Maximum displacement of joint particle P (as shown

y  At sin(t – k 2 x)
in figure) due to left string
At
= Ai + Ar
Ar Maximum displacement of joint particle due to right
v1 y  Ar sin(t  k 1x   ) string = At
figure (a) At the boundary (at point P) the wave must be

continuous, that is there are no kinks in it. Then we
must have Ai + Ar = At ...(iii)
On the other hand if the wave is produced on the
from equation (ii) & (iii)
heavier string which moves toward the junction a
part will the reflected and a part transmitted, no v1
inversion in waves shape will take place. Ai – Ar = v A t ...(iv)
2
The wave velocity is smaller for the heavier string
from eq. (iii) & (iv)
lighter string
v1  2v 2 
y  Ai sin( t – k 1x)
At =  v  v  A i
 1 2
v2
P
1 2  v 2 – v1 
Ar =  v  v  A i
 1 2
v2
v1
Ar At
P Note
y  Ar sin(t  k1x) y  At sin(t – k 2 x)

figure : (b)
Section E – Equation of standing wave (Sta- particles. Thus on superposition of two coherent
tionary waves) waves travelling in opposite direction the resulting
interference pattern, we call stationary waves, the
1. STANDING WAVES : oscillation amplitude of the medium particle at
In previous section we've discussed that when two different positions is different.
coherent waves superpose on a medium particle, At some point of medium the resultant amplitude is
phenomenon of interference takes place. Similarly maximum which are given as
when two coherent waves travelling in opposite R is maximum when cos kx = ± 1
direction superpose then simultaneous interference
if all the medium particles takes place. These waves 2
or x  N [N  I]
interfere to produce a pattern of all the medium 
particles what we call, a stationary wave. If the two
N
interfering waves which travel in opposite direction or x=
2
carry equal energies then no net flow of energy takes
place in the region of superposition. Within this  3
region redistribution of energy takes place between or x = 0, , , .....
2 2
medium particles. There are some medium particles
where constructive interference takes place and and the maximum value of R is given as
hence energy increases and on the other hand there Rmax= ± 2 A ...(6)
are some medium particles where destructive
 3
interference takes place and energy decreases. Now Thus in the medium at position x = 0, , , ,
2 2
we'll discuss the stationary waves analytically.
........... the waves interfere constructively and the
Let two waves of equal amplitude are travelling in
amplitude of oscillations becomes 2A. Similarly at
opposite direction along x-axis. The wave equation
some points of the medium, the waves interfere
of the two waves can be given as
destructively, the oscillation amplitude become
y1 = A sin (t – kx) minimum i.e. zero in this case. These are the points
[Wave travelling in +x direction] ...(1) where R is minimum, when
and y2 = A sin (t + kx) [Wave travelling in –x cos kx = 0
direction] ...(2)
2 x 
When the two waves superpose on medium particles, or  (2N  1)
 2
the resultant displacement of the medium particles
can be given as 
y = y1 + y2 or x = (2N + 1) [N  I]
4
or y = A sin (t – kx) + A sin (t + kx)
 3 5
or y = A [sint cos kx – cos t sin kx + sin or x , , ...........
4 4 4
t cos kx + cos t sin kx]
or y = 2A cos kx sin  t ...(3) and the minimum value of R is given as
Equation (3) can be rewritten as Rmin = 0 ...... (7)
y = R sin t ...(4)  3 5
Thus in the medium at position x = , ,
Where R = 2 A cos kx ...(5) 4 4 4
Here equation (4) is an equation of SHM. It implies ......... the waves interfere destructively and the
that after superposition of the two waves the medium amplitude of oscillation becomes zero. These points
particles executes SHM with same frequency  and always remain at rest. Figure (a) shows the oscillation
amplitude R which is given by equation (5) Here we amplitude of different medium particles in a
can see that the oscillation amplitude of medium stationary waves.
particles depends on x i.e. the position of medium
WAVES 2.21
(7) (8)
(9)
figure (b)
Figure (a)
Based on the above analysis of one complete
In figure (a) we can see that the medium particles oscillations of the medium particles, we can make
at which constructive interference takes place are some interference for a stationary waves. These are:
called antinodes of stationary wave and the points (i) In oscillations of stationary wave in a region, some
of destructive interference are called nodes of points are always at rest (nodes) and some oscillates
stationary waves which always remain at rest. with maximum amplitudes (antinodes). All other
Figure (b) explain the movement of medium particles medium particles oscillate with amplitudes less then
with time in the region where stationary waves are those of antinodes.
formed. Let us assume that at an instant t = 0 all the (ii) All medium particles between two successive
medium particles are at their extreme positions as nodes oscillate in same phase and all medium
shown in figure - (b - 1). Here points ABCD are the particles on one side of a node oscillate in opposite
nodes of stationary waves where medium particles phase with those on the other side of the same node.
remains at rest. All other starts moving towards their (iii) In the region of a stationary wave during one
complete oscillation all the medium particles come
T in the form of a straight line twice.
mean positions and t = all particles cross their
4
(iv) If the component wave amplitudes are equal,
mean position as shown in figure (b – 3), you can then in the region where stationary wave is formed,
see in the figure that the particles at nodes are not no net flow of energy takes place, only redistribution
moving. Now the medium crosses their mean position of energy takes place in the medium.
and starts moving on other side of mean position (a) Different Equation for a Stationary
toward the other extreme position. At time t = T/2, Wave
all the particles reach their other extreme position as Consider two equal amplitude waves travelling in
shown in figure (b - 5) and at time t = 3T/4 again all opposite direction as
these particles cross their mean position in opposite y1 = A sin (t – kx) ...(11)
direction as shown in figure (b - 7). and y2 = A sin (t + kx) ...(12)
The result of superposition of these two waves is
y = 2A cos kx sin t ...(13)
Which is the equation of stationary wave where 2A
(1) (2) cos kx represents the amplitude of medium particle
situated at position x and sin t is the time sinusoidal
factor. This equation (13) can be written in several
ways depending on initial phase differences in the
(3) (4)
component waves given by equation (11)) can (12).
If the superposing waves are having an initial phase
difference , then the component waves can be
expressed as
(5) (6)
y1 = A sin (t – kx) ...(14) Sol. General Equation of standing wave

y2 = – A sin (t – kx) ...(15) y = A cos t
Superposition of the above two waves will result where
y = 2A sin kx cos t ...(16) A = A sin (kx + )
Equation (16) is also an equation of stationary wave here =L
but here amplitude of different medium particles in
2
the region of interference is given by  k=
L
R = 2A sin kx ...(17)
Similarly the possible equations of a stationary wave  2 
can be written as A = A sin (kx + ) = A sin  x   
 L 
y = A0 sin kx cos ( t + ) ....(18)
at x = 0 node
y = A0 cos kx sin (t + ) ...(19)
 A = 0 at x = 0
y = A0 sin kx sin (t + ) ...(20)
 =0
y = A0 cos kx cos (t + ) ...(21)
Here A0 is the amplitude of antinodes. In a pure 2
eq. of standing wave = A sin x cos t
stationary wave it is given as L
A0 = 2A
EXAMPLE 14
Where A is the amplitude of component waves. If Figure shows the standing waves pattern in a string
we care fully look at equation (18) to (21), we can at t = 0. Find out the equation of the standing wave
see that in equation (18) and (20), the particle where the amplitude of antinode is 2A.
amplitude is given by
R = A0 sin kx ...(22) y
Here at x = 0, there is nodes as R = 0 and in equation 2A
(19) and (21) the particle amplitude is given as
A
R = A0 cos kx ...(23)
Here at x = 0, there is an antinode as R = A0. Thus x
we can state that in a given system of co-ordinates
–2A
when origin of system is at a node we use either
equation (18) or (20) for analytical representation
of a stationary wave and we use equation (19) or
Sol. Let we assume the equation of standing waves
(21) for the same when an antinode is located at the
origin of system. is = A sin (t + )
where A = 2A sin (kx + )
 x = 0 is node  A = 0, at x = 0
EXAMPLE 13
2A sin  = 0  =0
Find out the equation of the standing waves for the
following standing wave pattern. at t = 0 Particle at is at y = A and going towards
mean position.
x=L   5
x=0  =  
2 3 6
so eq. of standing waves is
2 x
(A) A sin x cos t (B) A sin L cos t  5 
L
y = 2Asin kx sin  t  
 6 
x x
(C) A cos 2 L cos t (D) A cos L cos t
WAVES 2.23
EXAMPLE 15 dm =  dx
A string 120 cm in length sustains standing wave Velocity of particle at mean position
with the points of the string at which the displacement = 2A sin kx 
amplitude is equal to 3.5 mm being separated by
15.0 cm. The maximum displacement amplitude is 1
then d (KE) = dx . 4A2 2 sin2kx  d (KE)
X. 95 mm then find out the value of X. 2
Sol. In this problem two cases are possible : = 2A22 . sin2kx dx
/2
2 2 2
 d(K.E)  2A    sin 0
kxdx
A x=0 B B x=0
15cm / 2
15cm 2 2
Total K.E = A    (1 – cos2kx)dx
0
Case-I is that A and B have the same displacement
amplitude and Case-2 is that C and D have the same /2
amplitude viz 3.5 mm. In case 1, if x = 0 is taken at  sin 2kx  1
 A 22  x – = A 2 2
antinode then  2k  0 2
A = a cos kx
In case -2, if x = 0 is taken at node, then Note
A = a sin kx
But since nothing is given in the question.
Hence from both the cases, result should be same.
This is possible only when Section F – Stationary waves in strings,
a cos kx = a sin kx vibration in string wave, sono
meter wire
 A 3.5
or kx = or a    4.95mm
1. STATIONARY WAVES IN STRINGS :
4 cos kx cos  / 4
(a) When both end of string is fixed :

(b) Energy of standing wave in one loop
A string of length L is stretched between two points.
When all the particles of one loop are at extreme When the string is set into vibrations, a transverse
position then total energy in the loop is in the form
progressive wave begins to travel along the string. It
of potential energy only when the particles reaches
is reflected at the other fixed end. The incident and
its mean position then total potential energy converts
the reflected waves interfere to produce a stationary
into kinetic energy of the particles so we can say
total energy of the loop remains constant. transverse wave in which the ends are always nodes,
if both ends of string are fixed.
Total kinetic energy at mean position is equal to
total energy of the loop because potential energy at Fundamental Mode
mean position is zero. (a) In the simplest form, the string vibrates in one loop
Small kinetic energy of the particle which is in in which the ends are the nodes and the centre is the
element dx is antinode. This mode of vibration is known as the
fundamental mode and frequency of vibration is known
as the fundamental frequency or first harmonic.
x dx
/2
1
d (KE) = dmv 2
2
The frequency f3 is known as third harmonic or


Since the distance between consecutive nodes is second overtone.
2
Thus a stretched string vibrates with frequencies,
 which are integral multiples of the fundamental
 L 1  1 = 2L
2 frequencies. These frequencies are known as
harmonics.
If f1 is the fundamental frequency of vibration, then
the velocity of transverse waves is given as, The velocity of transverse wave in stretched string
v T
v  1f1 or f1  ...(i) is given as v  . Where T = tension in the string.
2L 
 = linear density or mass per unit length of string.

First Overtone If the string fixed at two ends, vibrates in its
(b) The same string under the same conditions may fundamental mode, then
also vibrate in two loops, such that the centre is
1 T
also the node f ....(17)
2L 
2 2
 L  2 = L
2 n T
In general f = nth harmonic
2 
(n – 1)th overtone
  In general, any integral multiple of the fundamental
2 2 frequency is an allowed frequency. These higher
If f2 is frequency of vibrations frequenceis are called overtones. Thus, v1 = 2v0 is
the first overtone, v2 = 3v0 is the second overtone
v v etc. An integral multiple of a frequency is called its
 f2  
2 L harmonic. Thus, for a string fixed at both the ends,
all the overtones are harmonics of the fundamental
v frequency and all the harmonics of the fundamental
 f2  ...(ii)
L frequency are overtones.
The frequency f2 is known as second harmonic or
first overtone. (b) When one end of the string is fixed
Second Overtone and other is free :
(c) The same string under the same conditions free end acts as antinode
may also vibrate in three segments.
3 3 1. /4
 L
2
2
 3  L
3
If f3 is the frequency in this mode of vibration, then, 1 T
f fundamental or Ist harmonic
4 
3v
f3  ...(iii)
2L
WAVES 2.25
3 T
f IIIrd harmonic or Ist overtone
4 
2.   3 / 4 (2n  1) T 
In general : f  th
 ((2n + 1) harmonic,
4  
nth overtone)
S. No. Travelling waves Stationary waves
These waves advance in a medium with These waves remain stationary between
1
a definite velocity two boundaries in the medium.
In these waves, all particles except nodes

In these waves, all particles of the
oscillate with same frequency but
2 medium oscillate with same frequency
different amplitudes. Amplitude is zero at
and amplitude.
nodes and maximum at antinodes.
At any instant the phase of all particles

At any instant phase of vibration varies between two successive nodes is the
continuosly from one particle to the same, but phase of particles on one side
3  phase difference between two of a node is opposite to the phase of
other i.e.,
particles can have any value between particles on the other side of the node,
0 and 2 i.e, phase difference between any two
particles can be either 0 or
In these wave, at no instant all the In these waves all particles of the
4 particles of the medium pass through medium pass through their mean position
their mean positions simultaneously. simultaneously twice in each time period.
These waves transmit energy in the These waves do not transmit energy in
5
medium. the medium.
Note
Section A – Equation of Wave, Particle 5. The equation of a wave travelling along the positive
Velocity and Acceleration x-axis, as shown in figure at t=0 is given by
1. A transverse wave is described by the equation   y
Y = Y0 sin 2 (ft – x/). The maximum particle (A) sin  kx – t  
 6 1
velocity is equal to four times the wave velocity if 0
x
(A)  =  Y0/4 (B)  =  Y0/2   –0.5
(C)  =  Y0 (D)  = 2 Y0 (B) sin  kx – t – 
 6 –0.1
2. If the speed of the wave shown in the figure is 330    

(C) sin  t – kx   (D) sin  t – kx – 
m/s in the given medium, then the equation of the  6  6
wave propagating in the positive x-direction will be
- (all quantities are in MKS units) 6. The displacement produced by a simple harmonic
wave is :
10  x
y sin  2000  t   cm. The time period
  17 
and maximum velocity of the particle will be
respectively -
(A) 10–3 second and 200 m/s
(A) y = 0.05 sin 2  (4000 t – 12.5 x)
(B) 10–2 second and 2000 m/s
(B) y = 0.05 sin 2  (4000 t – 122.5 x)
(C) 10–3 second and 330 m/s
(C) y = 0.05 sin 2  (3300 t – 10 x)
(D) 10–4 second and 20 m/s
(D) y = 0.05 sin 2  (3300 x – 10 t)
3. A transverse wave of amplitude 0.50 m, wavelength
string, energy in waves
1 m and frequency 2 hertz is propagating in a string
in the negative x-direction. The expression form of 7. Both the strings, show in figure, are made of same
the wave is material and have same cross section. The pulleys
(A) y(x,t) = 0.5 sin (2x – 4t) are light. The wave speed of a transverse wave in
(B) y(x,t) = 0.5 cos (2x + 4t) the string AB is v1 and in
(C) y(x,t) = 0.5 sin (x – 2t) CD it is v2. The v1/v2 is A
(D) y(x,t) = 0.5 cos (2x – 2t) (A) 1
(B) 2
B C
4. A wave pulse is generated in a string that lies along (C) 2
x-axis. At the points A and B, as shown in figure, if
(D) 1/ 2 D
RA and RB are ratio of wave speed to the particle
speed respectively then :
y 8. A block of mass 1 kg is hanging vertically from a
string of length 1 m and Mass/length =0.001 kg/m.
B V A small pulse is generated at its lower end. The
Pulse reaches the top end in approximately.
A
x (A) 0.2 sec
(B) 0.1 sec
(A) RA > RB (B) RB > RA 1m
(C) 0.02 sec
(C) RA = RB (D) 0.01 sec
(D) Information is not sufficient to decide.
WAVES 2.27
9. A uniform rope of length 10 m and mass 15 kg hangs 12. The relation between frequency  wavelength 
vertically from a rigid support. A block of mass 5 and velocity of propagation vof a wave is-
kg is attached to the free end of the rope. A
transverse pulse of wavelength 0.08 m is produced 
(A) v   (B) =1
v
at the lower end of the 3 rope. The wavelength of
the pulse when it reaches the top of the rope will
v  
be- (C) =1 (D) + =1
 v v
(A) 0.08 m
(B) 0.04 m
(C) 0.16 m
(D) 0 m
Section C – Super position principle
10. A uniform rope having some mass hanges vertically 13. Two waves of equal amplitude A, and equal
from a rigid support. A transverse wave pulse is frequency travels in the same direction in a medium.
produced at the lower end. The speed (v) of the The amplitude of the resultant wave is
wave pulse varies with height (h) from the lower (A) 0 (B) A
end as: (C) 2A (D) between 0 and 2A
v v
14. When two waves of the same amplitude and
(A) (B) frequency but having a phase difference of ,
travelling with the same speed in the same direction
h h
(positive x), interfere, then
(A) their resultant amplitude will be twice that of a
v
v single wave but the frequency will be same
(B) their resultant amplitude and frequency will both
(C) (D) be twice that of a single wave
h
h (C) their resultant amplitude will depend on the phase
angle while the frequency will be the same
(D) the frequency and amplitude of the resultant
11. A wire of 102 kg m 1 passes over a frictionless light wave will depend upon the phase angle.
pulley fixed on the top of a frictionless inclined plane,
which makes an angle of 30° with the horizontal. 15. Two waves are represented by
Masses m and M are tied at two ends of wire such
y1 = a1 cos (t – kx) and
that m rests on the plane and M hangs freely
vertically downwards. The entire system is in y2 = a2 sin(t – kx + /3)
equilibrium and a transverse wave propagates along Then the phase difference between them is-
1
the wire with a velocity of 100 ms .
 
(A) (B)
3 2
m 1
(A) M=5 kg (B) 
M 4
5 
(C) (D)
m 6 6
(C) m=20 kg (D) 4
M
16. Standing waves are produced by superposition of 20. A Wave pulse on a string has the dimension shown
two waves in figure. The waves speed is v=1 cm/s. If point O
y1 = 0.05 sin (3t – 2x) and is a free end. The shape of wave at time t=3 s is:
y2 = 0.05 sin (3t + 2x)
Where x and y are measured in meter and t in v=1cm/s
second. Find the amplitude of particle at x = 0.5m 1 cm
[cos 57.3 = 0.54] O
(A) 0.54 m (B) 5.4 m 1cm 1cm 2cm
(C) 54 m (D) 0.054 m
O
17. If two waves are represented by :
1cm
y1=2 sin (4x – 300t) & (A) O (B)
y2 = sin (4x–300t – 0.2)
then their superposed wave will have angular
frequency -
1cm
(A) 150/ (B) 150 
2cm
(C) 300 (D) 600  (C) 1cm (D)
18. x1 = A sin (t – 0.1x) and O 1cm
 
x2 = A sin  t  0.1x  2 
 
21. A wave pulse, travelling on a two piece string, gets
Resultant amplitude of combined wave is– partially reflected and partially transmitted at the

junction. The reflected wave is inverted in shape
(A) 2A cos (B) A 2 cos  / 2 as compared to the incident one. If the incident wave
4
has wavelength  and the transmitted wave .
   (A)  >  (B)  = 
(C) 2A cos (D) A 21  cos 4 
2   (C)  < 
(D) nothing can be said about the relation of  and .
Section D – Reflection and transmission
between 2 string
22. Two sound waves are respectively
19. A pulse shown here is reflected from the rigid wall
A and then from free end B. The shape of the string y1 = a sin (t–kx) and y2 = b cos (t–kx).
after these 2 Reflection will be. The phase difference between the two waves is:
(A) /2 (B) /3
(C)  (D) 3/4
B A
23. Two waves are represented by the following

equations :
(A) A
(B) A y1 = 5 sin 2 (10t – 0.1 x) and
B B
y2 = 10 sin 2(20t – 0.2x)
Ratio of intensities I2/I1 will be -
(C) A
(D) A
(A) 1 (B) 2
B B
(C) 4 (D) 16
WAVES 2.29
24. Figure shows a rectangular pulse and a triangular 28. The equation for the vibration of a string fixed at
pulse approaching each other along x-axis. The both ends vibrating in its third harmonic is given by
pulse speed is 0.5 cm/s. What is the resultant y=2 cm sin [(0.6 cm–1)x]cos [(500 s–1)t]
displacement of medium particles due to The length of the string is –
superposition of waves at x = 0.5 cm and t = 2 sec. (A) 24.6 cm (B) 12.5 cm
(C) 20.6 cm (D) 15.7 cm
y (cm)
0.5 cm/s 0.5 cm/s
2
29. The vibrations of a string of length 60 cm fixed at
1 both ends are represented by the equation
x (cm)
–2 –1 0 1 2 3 y = 4 sin (x/15) cos(96t),
where x and y are in cm and t in seconds. The
(A) 3.5 cm (B) 2.5 cm maximum displacement at x = 5 cm is–
(C) 4 cm (D) 3 cm (A) 2 3 cm (B) 3 2 cm
(C) 2 cm (D) 3 cm
Section E – Equation of standing wave
(Stationary waves)
25. A wave is represented by the equation y = 1 30. If a wave is represented by the following equation
0sin 2 (100t  0.02 X )  10sin 2 (100t  0.02 X ). The 2x 2vt

y = A cos sin then it is a :
 
maximum amplitude and loop length are respectively
(A) Progressive wave
(A) 20 units and 30 units (B) 20 units and 25 units
(B) Stationary wave
(C) 30 units and 20 units (D) 25 units and 20 units
(C) Longitudinal progressive wave
(D) Transverse progressive wave
26. The resultant amplitude due to superposition of two
waves
Section F – Stationary waves in strings,
Y1  5sin ( wt  kx) and y2  5cos ( wt  kx  1500 ) vibration in string wave, sono
meter wire
(A) 5 (B) 5 3
31. Two wave pulses travel in opposite directions on a
(C) 5 2 – 3 (D) 5 2  3 string and approach each other. The shape of the
one pulse in inverted with respect to the other.
(A) the pulses will collide with each other and vanish
27. The equation of stationary wave along a stretched
after collision.
string is given by
(B) the pulses will reflect from each other i.e., the
x pulse going towards right will finally move towards
y = 5 sin cos 40  t
3 left and vice versa.
Where x and y are in cm and t in second. The (C) the pulses will pass through each other but their
separation between two adjacent nodes is - shapes will be modified
(A) 1.5 cm (B) 3 cm (D) the pulses will pass through each other without
(C) 6 cm (D) 4 cm any change in their shape.
32. A wire of linear mass density 9x10 –3 kg/m is 34. In a stationary wave represented by y = a sin t
stretched between two rigid supports under a cos kx, amplitude of the component progressive
tension of 360 N. The wire resonates at frequency wave is :
210 Hz. The next higher frequency at which the
a
same wire resonates is 280 Hz. The number of loops (A) (B) a
2
produced in first case will be-
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 2a (D) None
(C) 3 (D) 4
35. The rate of transfer of energy in a wave depends
33. A stretched sonometer wire resonates at a (A) directly on the square of the wave amplitude
frequency of 350 Hz and at the next higher and square of the wave frequency
frequency of 420 Hz. The fundamental frequency (B) directly on the square of the wave amplitude
of this wire is : and square root of the wave frequency
(A) 350 Hz (B) 5 Hz (C) directly on the wave frequency and square of
(C) 70 Hz (D) 170 Hz the wave amplitude
(D) directly on the wave amplitude and square of
the wave frequency.
WAVES 2.31
Section A – Equation of Wave, Particle 5. A sinusoidal progressive wave is generated in a

Velocity and Acceleration
string. It’s equation is given by y = (2 mm) sin (2x
1. The displacement of a particle of a string carrying – 100 t + /3). The time when particle at x = 4 m
a travelling wave is given by first passes through mean position, will be
y = (3 cm) sin 6.28 (0.50 x – 50 t)
1 1
where x is in centimeter and t is in second. The (A) sec (B) sec
150 12
velocity of the wave is-
(A) 100 m/s (B) 50 cm/s 1 1
(C) sec (D) sec
(C) 100 cm/s (D) 10 m/s 300 100
2. The equation of a progressive wave is 6. A transverse wave is described by the equation

y = A sin [2(ft – x/)]. The maximum particle
 4  velocity is equal the wave velocity if :
y = 0.4 sin 120t  5 x 
 
(A)  = A/4 (B) =A/2
Where distance is in meters and time is in seconds. (C)  = A (D)  = 2A
Calculate frequency and wavelength.
(A) 60 Hz, 2.5 m (B) 30 Hz, 3 m Section B – Speed of transverse wave on
(C) 90 Hz, 2.5 m (D) 60 Hz, 5 m string, energy in waves
7. A wire is 4 m long and has a mass 0.2 kg. The wire

 2x  is kept horizontally. A transverse pulse is generated
3. An equation y = acos2  2nt   represents a
   by plucking one end of the taut (tight) wire. The
wave with- pulse makes four trips back and forth along the cord
(A) amplitude a, frequency n and wavelength  in 0.8 sec. The tension is the cord will be -
(B) amplitude a, frequency 2n and wavelength 2 (A) 80 N (B) 160 N
a (C) 240 N (D) 320 N
(C) amplitude , frequency 2n and wavelength 
2
8. A string of 7 m length has a mass of 0.035 kg. If
a 
(D) amplitude , frequency 2n and wavelength tension in the string is 60.5 N, then speed of a wave
2 2
on the string is :
(A) 77 m/s (B) 102 m/s
4. When a plane wave train transverses a medium,
(C) 110 m/s (D) 165 m/s
individual particles execute a periodic motion given
 x 
by the equation y = 5 sin 4  4 t  16  where the Section C – Super position principle
 
lengths are expressed in centimeters and time in
seconds. The phase difference for two positions of 9. Three waves of equal frequencies having
the same particles which are occupied at a time amplitudes 10 m, 4m and m arrive at a given
interval 0.8 s apart is- point with successive phase difference of . The
(A) 72° (B) 144° amplitude of the resulting wave in  m is given by -
(C) 102° (D) 36° (A) 7 (B) 6
(C) 5 (D) 4
10. In the figure the intensity of waves arriving at D 14. Two pulses in a stretched string whose centers are
from two coherent sources S1 and S2 is I0. The initially 8 cm apart are moving towards each other
wavelength of the wave is  = 4 m. Resultant as shown in Figure. The speed of each pulse is 2 cm
intensity at D will be - S 4m s-1. After 2 second the total energy of the pulses will
1 D
(A) 4I0 be
(B) I0 3m (A) zero
(C) 2I0 (B) purely kinetic
(D) zero S2 (C) purely potential 8 cm
(D) partly kinetic and partly potential.

11. Two pulses in a stretched string, whose centres are
initially 8 cm apart, are moving towards each other
as shown in the figure. The speed of each pulse is 15. Two waves represented by y1 = a sin t and y2 = a
2 cm/s. After 2 s the total energy of the pulses will 
be: sin (t + ) with  = are superposed at any point
2
(A) zero at a particular instant. The resultant amplitude is
(B) purely kinetic 8 cm (A) a (B) 4a
(C) purely potential
(D) parely kinetic and parely potential (C) 2a (D) zero
12. Equations of two progressive waves at a 16. A harmonic wave is travelling on string 1. At a
certain point in a medium are given by junction with string 2 it is partly reflected and partly
y1 = a sin (t + 1) and y2 = a sin (t + 2). If transmitted. The linear mass density of the second
amplitude and time period of resultant wave formed string is four times that of the first string, and that
by the superposition of these two waves is same as the boundary between the two strings is at x =0. If
that of both the waves, then 1 – 2 is the expression for the incident wave is, yi = Ai cos
 2 (k1x – 1t)
(A) (B)
3 3 Then findout the expression for the transmitted
wave.
 
(C) (D)
6 4 1 3
(A) A i cos(2k1x – 1 t) (B) Ai cos(2k1x – 1t)
3 2
13. There are three strings RP, PQ, and QS as shown.
2
Their mass and lengths are RP = (0.1 kg, 2m), (C) Ai cos(2k1x – 1t) (D) None
3
PQ = (0.2 kg, 3 m), QS = (0.15 kg, 4m) respectively.
All the strings are under same tension. Wave-1 is
incident at P. It is partly reflected (wave-2) and Section D – Reflection and transmission
partly transmitted (wave-3). Now wave-3 is incident between 2 string
at Q. It is again partly transmitted (wave-5) and
17. A composition String is made up by joining two
partly reflected (wave-4). Phase difference
strings of different masses per unit length
between wave-1 and wave
  and 4. the composite string is under the same
1 3 5
tension. A transverse wave pulse: Y = (6mm) sin
P Q
(5t+40x), Where ‘t’ is in seconds and ‘x’ in meters,
R S
is sent along the lighter string towards the joint. The
2 4 joint is at x=0. The equation of the wave pulse
(A) 2 is  (B) 4 is zero reflected from the joint is
(C) both (a) and (b) are correct (A) (2mm) sin (5t-40x) (B) (4 mm) sin (40x-5t)
(D) both (a) and (b) are wrong (C) –(2 mm) sin (5t-40x) (D) (2 mm) sin (5t-10x)
WAVES 2.33
18. In the previous question, the percentage of power 22. Under what conditions 75% of incident
transmitted to the heavier string through the joint is energy is transmitted
approximately v1 1 v1 1
(A) 33% (B) 89% (A) v  2 (B) v  3
2 2
(C) 67% (D) 75%
v1 1 v1 2
19. A wave moving with constant speed on a uniform (C) v  4 (D) v  3
2 2
string passes the point x = 0 with amplitude A0,
angular frequency 0 and average rate of energy
transfer P0. As the wave travels down the string it Section E – Equation of standing wave
gradually loses energy and at the point x = , the (Stationary waves)
P
average rate of energy transfer becomes 0 . At 20
2 23. A Standing Wave y  A sin(  x ) cos (1000 t ) is
the point x = , angular frequency and amplitude 3
are respectively. maintained in a taut string where y and x are
expressed in meters. The distance between the
(A) 0 and A0 / 2
successive points oscillating with the amplitude A/2
(B) 0/ y  Asin  ωt kx  . and A0 across a node is equal to
(C) less than 0 and A0 (A) 2.5 cm (B) 25 cm
(D) 0/ 2 and A0 / 2 (C) 5 cm (D) 10 cm
20. A metallic Wire of length L is fixed between two 24. A wave represented by the equation
rigid supports. If the wire is cooled through a y = a cos (kx – t) is superposed with another wave
temperature difference T (Y = young’s modulus,  to form a stationary wave such that the point x = 0
= density,  = coefficient of linear expansion) is a node. The equation for other wave is :
then the frequency of transverse vibration is (A) a sin (kx + t) (B) – a cos (kx + t)
proportional to: (C) – a cos (kx – t) (D) – a sin (kx – t)
 Y
(A)  Y (B) 25. A taut string at both ends vibrates in its nth overtone.
 The distance between adjacent Node and antinode
 is found to be ‘d’ If the length of the string is L, then

(C) (D) (A) L=2d(n+1) (B) L=d(n+1)
Y Y
(C) L=2dn (D) L = 2d(n – 1)
Passage Q. No. 21 to 22 26. A standing wave pattern of amplitude A in a string

In the shown figure answer the following two of length L shows 2 nodes (plus those at two ends).
questions. If one end of the string corresponds to the origin
and v is the speed of progressive wave, the
Transmitted
disturbance in the string, could be represented (with
incident
appropriate phase) as:
1 2
 2x   2 vt 
(A) y(x, t) = A sin   cos  
Reflected  L   L 
21. If P i , P r and P t are powers of incident,  3x   2 vt 

(B) y(x, t) = A cos   sin  
reflected and transmitted waves and ii, Ir and It the  L   L 
corresponding intensities, then
 4x   4 vt 
(A) Pi = Pr +Pt (C) y(x, t) = A cos   cos  
 L   L 
(B) Ii = Ir + It
(C) both (a) and (b) are correct  3x   3vt 
(D) both (a) and (b) are wrong (D) y(x, t) = A sin   cos  
 L   L 
27. The equation of a wave disturbance is given as : 29. A string of length 1m and linear mass density 0.01
kgm–1 is stretched to a tension of 100N.when both
 
y  0.02cos   50t  cos(10x) , where x and y ends of the string are fixed, the three lowest
2 
frequencies for standing wave are f1, f2 and f3. when
are in meters and t in seconds. Choose the wrong only one end of the string is fixed, the three lowest
statement frequencies for standing wave are n1, n2 and n3. Then
(A) Antinode occurs at x = 0.3 m (A) n3 = 5n1 = f3 = 125 Hz
(B) The wavelength is 0.2 m (B) f3 = 5f1 = n2 = 125 Hz
(C) The speed of the constituent waves is 4m/s (C) f3 = n2 = 3f1 = 150 Hz
(D) Node occurs at x = 0.15 m
f1  f 2
(D) n 2   75 Hz
2
vibration in string wave, sono
meter wire 30. A string is fixed at both ends vibrates in a resonant
mode with a separation 2.0 cm between the
28. The frequency of a sonometer wire is f, but when consecutive nodes. For the next higher resonant
the weights producing the tensions are completely frequency, this separation is reduced to 1.6 cm. The
immersed in water the frequency becomes f/2 and length of the string is
on immersing the weights in a certain liquid the (A) 4.0 cm (B) 8.0 cm
frequency becomes f/3. The specific gravity of the
(C) 12.0 cm (D) 16.0 cm
liquid is:
4 16 31. Figure, shows a stationary wave between two fixed

(A) (B)
3 9 points P and Q.
15 32 Which point(s) of 1, 2 and 3 are in phase with the

(C) (D) point x?
12 27
P X 1 23 Q
(A) 1, 2 and 3 (B) 1 and 2 only

(C) 2 and 3 only (D) 3 only
WAVES 2.35
Section A – Euqation of Wave, Particle 4. The points moving with maximum speed is/are
Velocity and Acceleration (A) b (B) c
1. A wave equation which gives the displacement (C) d (D) h
along the Y direction is given by
Y = 10–4 sin (60t + 2x) 5. The points moving upward is/are
where x and y are in metres and t is time in seconds. (A) a (B) c
This represents a wave (C) f (D) g
(A) travelling with a velocity of 30 m/s in the negative
x direction.
6. The points moving downwards is/are
(B) of wavelength  metre
(A) o (B) b
(C) of frequency 30/ hertz
(C) d (D) h
(D) of amplitude 10–4 metre travelling along the
negative x direction.
7. A perfectly elastic uniform string is suspended
2. The displacement of a particle in a medium due to vertically with its upper end fixed to the ceiling and
a wave travelling in the x-direction through the lower end loaded with the weight. If a transverse
the medium is given by y = A sin (t – x), where wave is imparted to the lower end of the string, the
t = time, and  and  are constants : pulse will
(A) the frequency of the wave is  (A) not travel along the length of the string
(B) the frequency of the wave is /2 (B) travel upwards with increasing speed
(C) the wavelength is 2/ (C) travel upwards with decreasing speed
(D) the velocity of the wave is /
(D) travelled upwards with constant acceleration

8. One end of a string of length L is tied to the ceiling
of a lift accelerating upwards with an acceleration
Question No. 3 to 6 (4 questions)
2g. The other end of the string is free. The linear
The figure represents the instantaneous picture of
mass density of the string varies linearly from 0 to
a transverse harmonic wave traveling along the
 from bottom to top.
negative x-axis. Choose the correct alternative(s)
related to the movement of the nine points shown (A) The velocity of the wave in the string will be 0.
in the figure. (B) The acceleration of the wave on the string will
y b be 3g/4 every where.
a c h (C) The time taken by a pulse to reach from bottom
o x
d
e g to top will be 8L / 3g .
f
3. The stationary points is/are (D) The time taken by a pulse to reach from bottom
(A) o (B) b to top will be 4L / 3g .

(C) f (D) h
Section D – Reflection and transmission be- Section F – Stationary waves in strings,

tween 2 string vibration in string wave, sono
meter wire
 x
9. A plane wave y = A sin   t   undergo a normal 12. A clamped string is oscillating in nth harmonic, then
 v
(A) total energy of oscillations will be n2 times that
incidence on a plane boundary separating medium of fundamental frequency
M1 and M2 and splits into a reflected and transmitted
(B) total energy of oscillations will be
wave having speeds v1 and v2 then
(n–1)2 times that of fundamental frequency
(A) for all values of v1 and v2 the phase of
(C) average kinetic energy of the string over a
transmitted wave is same as that of incident wave
complete oscillations is half of that of the total
(B) for all values of v1 and v2 the phase of reflected energy of the string.
wave is same as that of incident wave
(D) none of these.
(C) the phase of transmitted wave depends upon
v1 and v2
13. In a stationary wave,
(D) the phase of reflected wave depends upon v1
and v2 (A) all the particles of the medium vibrate in phase
(B) all the antinodes vibrate in phase
(C) the alternate antinodes vibrate in phase
Section E – Equation of standing wave
(Stationary waves) (D) all the particles between consecutive nodes
vibrate in phase
10. The vibration of a string fixed at both ends are
described by Y = 2 sin(x)sin (100t) where Y is in
14. Two waves of equal frequency f and velocity v travel
mm, x is in cm, t in sec then
in opposite directions along the same path. The
(A) Maximum displacement of the particle at waves have amplitudes A and 3A. Then :
x = 1/6 cm would be 1mm.
(A) the amplitude of the resulting wave varies with
(B) velocity of the particle at x = 1/6 cm at time position between maxima of amplitude 4A and
t = 1/600 sec will be 1573 mm/s minima of zero amplitude
(C) If the length of the string be 10 cm, number of (B) the distance between a maxima and adjacent
loop in it would be 5 minima of amplitude is V/2f
(D) None of these (C) at point on the path the average displacement
is zero
11. In a standing wave on a string. (D) the position of a maxima or minima of amplitude
(A) In one time period all the particles are does not change with time
simultaneously at rest twice.
(B) All the particles must be at their positive
extremes simultaneously once in one time period.
(C) All the particles may be at their positive
extremes simultaneously once in a time period.
(D) All the particles are never at rest simultaneously.
WAVES 2.37
Section A – Equation of Wave, Particle Section B – Speed of transverse wave on

Velocity and Acceleration string, energy in waves
4. Two strings A and B with  = 2 kg/m and

1. Consider the wave y = (5 mm) sin (1 cm–1) x – (60
 = 8 kg/m respectively are joined in series and
s–1)t] Find (a) the amplitude (b) the wave number,
kept on a horizontal table with both the ends fixed.
(c) the wavelength, (d) the frequency, (e) the time
The tension in the string is 200 N. If a pulse of
period and (f) the wave velocity.
amplitude 1 cm travels in A towards the junction,
then find the amplitude of reflected and transmitted
pulse.
2. The wave function for a traveling wave on a taut
string is (in SI unit) 5. A parabolic pulse given by equation y (in cm) = 0.3
y(x, t) = (0.350 m) sin (10 t – 3x + /4) – 0.1 (x – 5t)2 ( y  0) x in meter and t in second
travelling in a uniform string. The pulse passes
(a) What are the speed and direction of travel of
through a boundary beyond which its velocity
the wave ?
becomes 2.5 m/s. What will be the amplitude of
(b) What is the vertical displacement of the string pulse in this medium after transmission ?
at t = 0, x = 0.100 m ?
6. In the arrangement shown in figure, the string has
(c) What are wavelength and frequency of the mass of 4.5 g. How much time will it take for a
wave ? transverse disturbance produced at the floor to
(d) What is the maximum magnitude of the reach the pulley? Take g = 10 m/s2
transverse speed of a particle of the string ?
25cm
3. The string shown in figure is driven at a frequency
of 5.00 Hz. The amplitude of the motion is 12.0 cm, 2.0m
2kg
and the wave speed is 20.0 m/s. Furthermore, the
wave is such that y = 0 at x = 0 and t = 0. Determine
(a) the angular frequency and (b) wave number for
this wave. (c) Write an expression for the wave
Section C – Super position principle
function. Calculate (d) the maximum transverse
speed and (e) the maximum transverse acceleration
of a point on the string. 7. Two waves are described by
y1 = 0.30 sin [(5x – 200)t] and y2 = 0.30 sin [(5x
y – 200t) + /3]
where y1, y2 and x are in meters and t is in seconds.
x
When these two waves are combined, a traveling
wave is produced. What are the (a) amplitude, (b)
x=0
wave speed, and (c) wave length of that traveling
wave ?
8. A particle on stretched string supporting a travelling Section E – Equation of standing wave

wave, takes 5.0 ms to move from its mean position (Stationary waves)
to the extreme position. The distance between two 12. A nylon guitar string has a linear density of 7.20
consecutive particles, which are at their mean g/m and is under a tension of 150 N. The fixed
position, is 2.0 cm. Find the frequency, the supports are distance D = 90.0 cm apart. The string
wavelength and the wave speed. is oscillating in the standing wave pattern shown in
figure. Calculate the (a) speed wavelength, and (c)
frequency of the traveling waves whose
9. A 200 Hz wave with amplitude 1 mm travels on a superposition gives this standing wave.
long string of linear mass density 6 g/m kept under D
a tension of 60 N. (a) Find the average power
transmitted across a given point on the string. (b)
Find the total energy associated with the wave in a
2.0m long portion of the string.
13. A string oscillates according to the equation
Section D – Reflection and transmission   –1  

y=(0.50 cm) sin  cm  x  cos [(40  s–1)t]
between 2 string  3  
10. A travelling wave of amplitude 5 A is partially What are the (a) amplitude and (b) speed of the
reflected from a boundary with the amplitude 3 A. two waves (identical except for direction of travel)
whose superposition gives this oscillation ? (c) What
Due to superposition of two waves with different
is the distance between nodes ? (d) What is the
amplitudes in opposite directions a standing wave
transverse speed of a particle of the string at the
pattern is formed. Determine the amplitude at node
position x = 1.5 cm when t = 9/8 s ?
and antinodes.

11. The equation of a plane wave travelling along vibration in string wave, sono
meter wire
2
positive direction of x-axis is y = a sin (vt – x)
 14. A string vibrates in 4 loops with a frequency of
When this wave is reflected at a rigid surface and 400 Hz.
its amplitude becomes 80%, then find the equation (a) What is its fundamental frequency ?
of the reflected wave (b) What is frequency will cause it to vibrate into
7 loops.
15. A sonometer wires resonates with a given tuning

fork forming standing waves with five antinodes
between the two bridges when a mass of 9 kg is
suspended from the wire. When this mass is
replaced by M, the wire resonates with the same
tuning fork forming three antinodes for the same
position of bridges. Find the value of M.
WAVES 2.39
Section A – Equation of Wave, Particle Section C – Super position principle

Velocity and Acceleration interference of waves
1. The figure shows a snap photograph of a

5. A string that is stretched between fixed supports
vibrating string at t = 0. The particle P is
separated by 75.0 cm has resonant frequencies of
observed moving up with velocity 20 cm/s. The
420 and 315 Hz with no intermediate resonant
angle made by string with x-axis at P is 6°.
frquencies. What are
y
–3 (a) the lowest resonant frequencies and (b) the wave
(in10 m)
4 P speed ?
x
0 1.5 3.5 5.5 7.5
–2
(in10 m) 6. A string fixed at both ends is vibrating in the lowest
(a) Find the direction in which the wave is moving mode of vibration for which a point at quarter of its
(b) the equation of the wave lengths from one end is a point of maximum
displacement. The frequency of vibration in this
(c) the total energy carried by the wave per cycle
mode is 100 Hz. What will be the frequency emitted
of the string, assuming that , the mass per unit
length of the string = 50 gm/m. when it vibrates in the next mode such that this
point is again a point of maximum displacement.
2. A uniform rope of length L and mass m is held at

one end and whirled in a horizontal circle with Section D – Reflection and transmission
angular velocity . Ignore gravity. Find the time between 2 string
required for a transverse wave to travel from one
end of the rope to the other. 7. In a stationary wave pattern that forms as a result
of reflection of waves from an obstacle the ratio of
the amplitude at an antinode and a node is  = 1.5.
What percentage of the energy passes across the
obstacle?
3. A symmetrical triangular pulse of maximum height
0.4m and total length 1 m is moving in the positive
8. A 6.00 m segment of a long string has a mass of
x-direction on a string on which the wave speed is
180 g. A high-speed photograph shows the at
24 m/s. At t = 0 the pulse is entirely located between
segment contains four complete cycles of wave.
x = 0 and x = 1 m. Draw a graph of the transverse
velocity of particle of string versus time at x = +1m. The string is vibrating sinusoidally with a frequency
of 50.0 Hz and a peak=to-valley displacement of
15.0 cm. (The "peak-to-valley" displacement is the
4. A uniform rope of length 12 m and mass 6 kg hange
vertical distance from the farthest positive
vertically from a rigid support. A block of mass
displacement to the farthest negative displacement.
2kg is attached to the free end of the rope. A
transverse pulse of wavelength 0.06 m is produced (a) Write the function that describes this wave
at the lower end of the rope. What is the wavelength traveling in the positive x direction. (b) Determine
of the pulse when it reaches the top of the rope ? the power being supplied to the string.
Section E – Equation of standing wave Section F – Stationary waves in strings,

(Stationary waves) vibration in string wave, sono
meter wire
9. What are (a) the lowest frequency, (b) the second
lowest frequency, and (c) the third lowest frequency
11. A steel wire of length 1 m and density
for standing waves on a wire that is 10.0 m long
8000 kg m–3 is stretched tightly between two rigid
has a mass of 100 g. and is stretched under a tension
supports. When vibrating in its fundamental mode,
of 250 N which is fixed at both ends ?
its frequency is 200 Hz.
(a) What is the velocity of transverse waves along
10. In an experiment of standing waves, a string 90 cm this wire ?
long is attached to the prong of an electrically driven
(b) What is the longitudinal stress in the wire?
tuning fork that oscillates perpendicular to the length
of the string at a frequency of 60 Hz. The mass of (c) If the maximum acceleration of the wire is 800
the string is 0.044 kg. What tension must the string ms–2, what is the amplitude of vibration at the mid-
be under (weights are attached to the other end) if point ?
it is to oscillate in four loops ?
12. A guitar string is vibrating in its fundamental mode,
with nodes at each end. The length of the segment
of the string that is free to vibrate is 0.386 m. The
maximum transverse acceleration of a point at the
middle of the segment is 8.40 × 103 m/s2 and the
maximum transverse velocity is 3.80 m/s.
a) What is the amplitude of this standing wave?
b) What is the wave speed for the transverse
traveling waves on this string?
WAVES 2.41
1. A string is stretched between fixed points separated 5. A travelling wave represented by

by 75.0 cm. It is observed to have resonant y  Asin  ωt  kx  is superimposed on another
frequencies of 420 Hz and 315 Hz. There are no wave represented by y  Asin  ωt  kx  . The
other resonant frequencies between these two. resultant is [AIEEE 2011]
Then, the lowest resonant frequency for this (A) A standing wave having nodes at
string is [AIEEE 2006]  1λ
(A) 105 Hz (B) 1.05 Hz x   n   , n  0,1,2
 22
(C) 1050 Hz (D) 10.5 Hz (B) A wave travelling along + x direction
(C) A wave travelling along - x direction
2. A wave travelling along the x-axis is described by nλ
(D) A standing wave having nodes at x  ; n=0, 1, 2
the equation y(x,t) = 0.005 cos  αx  βt  . If the 2
wavelength and the time period of the wave are

6. Statement I Two longitudinal waves given by
0.08 m and 2.0s, respectively. then α andβ in
equations- y1  x, t   2asin  ωt  kx  and
appropriate units are [AIEEE 2008]
y 2  x, t   asin  2ωt  2 kx  will have equal
0.08 2.0 intensity. [AIEEE 2011]
(A) α  25.00π,β  π (B) α  ,β 
π π Statements II Intensity of waves of given
0.04 1.0 π frequency in same medium is proportional to square
(C) α  ,β  (D) α  12.50π,β  fo amplitude only.
π π 2.0
(A) Statement I is true, Statement II is true
(B) Statement I is true, Statement II is false
3. The equation of a wave on a string of linear mass (C) Statement I is true, Statement II true; Statement
density 0.04 kg m–1 is given by II is the correct explanation of Statement I
(D) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; Statement
  t x 
y = 0.02 (m) sin  2 π    II is not correct explanation of Statement I
  0.04(s) 0.50(m) 
The tension in the string is [AIEEE 2009] 7. A uniform string of length 20 m is suspended from
(A) 4.0 N (B) 12.5 N a rigid support. A short wave pulse is introduced at
(C) 0.5 N (D) 6.25 N its lowest end. It starts moving up the string. The
time taken to reach the support is :
4. The transverse displacement y (x, t) of awave on a (take g = 10 ms–2) [AIEEE 2016]

 ax 2  bt 2  2 ab xt  (A) 2 s (B) 2 2 s
string is given by y  x, t   e . This
represents a [AIEEE 2011] (C) 2 s (D) 2 2 s
b
(A) wave moving in-x direction with speed
a 8. A pipe open at both ends has a fundamental
frequency f in air. The pipe is dipped vertically in
(B) standing wave of frequency b water so that half of it is in water. The fundamental
1 frequency of the air column is now :[AIEEE 2016]
(C) standing wave of frequency 3f
b (A) (B) 2f
4
a f
(D) wave moving in + x direction with speed (C) f (D)
b 2
1. A transverse harmonic disturbance is produced in 5. When two progressive waves y1 = 4 sin (2x – 6t)
a string. The maximum transverse velocity is 3 m/s
and maximum transverse acceleration is 90 m/s2. If  
and y2 = 3 sin  2x  6t   are superimposed, the
the wave velocity is 20 m/s then find the waveform.  2
[JEE-2005] amplitude of the resultant wave is : [JEE 2010]
2. A massless rod is suspended by two identical strings 6. A horizontal stretched string, fixed at two ends, is
AB and CD of equal length. A block of mass m is vibrating in its fifth harmonic according to the
suspended from point O such that BO is equal to equation, y(x,t) = (0.01 m) sin [(62.8 m-1)x] cos
‘x’. Further, it is observed that the frequency of 1st
[ 628s 1  t] Assuming   = 3.14, the correct
harmonic (fundamental frequency) in AB is equal
to 2nd harmonic frequency in CD. Then, length of statement (s) is (are) [JEE-2013]
BO is [JEE-2006] (A) The number of nodes is 5.
L (B) The length of the string is 0.25 m.
(A)
5 (C) The maximum displacement of the midpoint of
C
A the string, from its equilibrium position is 0.01 m.
L
(B) (D) The fundamental frequency is 100 Hz.
4
4L B D 7. One end of a taut string of length 3m along the x

(C)
5 axis is fixed at x = 0. The speed of the waves in the
L
x string is 100 ms-1. The other end of the string is
3L m vibrating in the direction so that stationary waves
(D)
4 are set up in the string. the possible waveform of
these stationary waves is (are)
3. A transverse sinusoidal wave moves along a string [JEE Advanced 2014]
in the positive x-direction at a speed of 10 cm/s. x 50 t
The wavelength of the wave is 0.5 m and its ampli- (A) y (t) = A sin cos
6 3
tude is 10 cm. At a particular time t, the snap-shot
of the wave is shown in figure. The velocity of point x 100t
P when its displacement is 5 cm is Figure : (B) y (t) = A sin cos
3 3
y
3 5x 250t
(A) ĵ m/s P (C) y (t) = A sin cos
50 6 3
x
3 ˆ 5x
(B) – j m/s (D) y (t) = A sin cos 250 t
50 2
3 3 ˆ
(C) î m/s (D) – i m/s
50 50 8. Four harmonic waves of equal frequencies and equal
[JEE-2008] intensities I0 have phase angles 0, /3, 2/3 and .
when they are superposed, the intensity of the
4. A 20 cm long string, having a mass of 1.0 g, is fixed resulting wave is nI0. The value of n is -
at both the ends. The tension in the string is 0.5 N.
[JEE-2015]
The string is set into vibrations using an external
vibrator of frequency 100 Hz. Find the separation
(in cm) between the successive nodes on the string.
[JEE 2009]
WAVES 2.43

1. B 2. C 3. B 4. A 5. D
6. A 7. D 8. D 9. C 10. C
11. C 12. B 13. D 14. C 15. D
16. D 17. C 18. A 19. A 20. D
21. C 22. A 23. D 24. D 25. B
26. A 27. B 28. D 29. A 30. B
31. D 32. C 33. C 34. A 35. A

1. C 2. A 3. D 4. B 5. C
6. D 7. A 8. C 9. C 10. C
11. B 12. B 13. C 14. B 15. C
16. C 17. C 18. B 19. A 20. B
21. A 22. B 23. C 24. B 25. A
26. D 27. C 28. D 29. D 30. B
31. C

1. A,B,C,D 2. B,C,D 3. B,C 4. C,D 5. A,D
6. C 7. B,D 8. B,C 9. A,D 10. A,B
11. A,C 12. A,C 13. C,D 14. C,D

2
1. (a) amplitude A = 5 mm ; (b) wave number k = 1 cm–1 ; (c) wavelength  = = 2 cm
k
 60 1 
(d) frequency v = = Hz ; (e) time period T = = s
2 2 v 30
(f) wave velocity u = n = 60 cm/s
10 
2. (a) im / s (b) –5.48 cm (c) 0.667 m, 5.00 Hz (d) 11.0 m/s
3
3. (a) 10  rad/s (b) /2 rad/m (c) y = (0.120m) sin (1.57x – 31.4 t) (d) 1.2  m/s
(e) 118 m/s2
1 2
4. Ar = – cm, At = cm 5. 0.2 cm 6. 0.02 s
3 3
7. (a) 0.52 m ; (b) 40 m/s ; (c) 0.40 m 8. 50 Hz, 4.0 cm, 2.0 m/s
2 
9. (a) 0.47 W, (b) 9.4 mJ 10. 2 A, 8 A 11. y = 0.8 a sin ( vt  x  )
 2
12. (a) 144 m/s ; (b) 60.0 cm ; (c) 241 Hz
13. (a) 0.25 cm (b) 1.2 × 102 cm/s; (c) 3.0 cm; (d) 0
14. (a) 100 Hz (b) 700 Hz 15. 25 kg
 1 
1. (a) negative x; (b) y = 4 × 10 –3 sin 100  3 t  0.5 x   (x, y in meter) ;
 400 
vp
19.2 m/s

(c) 144  × 10–5 J 2.
2
3. 1/48 sec1/24 sec t
–19.2m/s
4. 0.12 m 5. (a) 105 Hz ; (b) 158 m/s
6. 300 Hz 7. 4. 96% 8. (a) y=(7.50 cm) sin (4.19 x–314 t) (b) 625 W
5 10 5 10
9. (a) Hz ; (b) 5 10 Hz ; (c) Hz 10. 36 N
2 2
11. (a) C = 400 ms–1 ; (b) stress =1.28 × 109 Nm–2 ; (c) a = 0.02/42
12. a. 1.72 × 10–3 m. ; b. 272 m/s.

1. A 2. A 3. D 4. A 5. A
6. B 7. B 8. C
3
1. y = (10 cm) sin (30 t ± x + f) 2. A 3. A 4. 5
2
5. 5 6. B, C 7. A,C,D 8. 3
SOUND WAVES 3.1
SOUND WAVES
CHAPTER
3
Section A - Equation of pressure wave, When Prong B moves outward towards right it
Velocity, Newton's and laplace compresses the air in front of it, causing the pressure
formula, Loudness and to rise slightly. The region of increased pressure is
intensity, Energy in sound
called a compression pulse and it travels away from
waves
the prong with the speed of sound.
1. SOUND WAVES A B
Sound is type of longitudnal wave. In general . . . . . . . . .
majority of longitudinal waves are termed as sound . . . . . . . . .
. ............. . . v. . . . .
. ..... . . . . . . .
waves. Sound is produced by a vibrating source, . ..... . . . . . . .
like when a gong of a bell is struck with a hammer, normal atmospheric
sound is produced. The vibrations produced by gong pressure
Undisturbed tuning fork
are propagated through air, Through air these
vibrations reach to the ear and ear drum is set into After producing the compression pulse, the prong
vibrations and these vibrations are communicated B reverses its motion and moves inward. This
to human brain. By touching the gong of bell by drages away some air from the region in front of it,
hand, we can feel the vibrations. causing the pressure to dip slightly below the normal
pressure. This region of decreased pressure is called
2. PROPAGATION OF SOUND WAVES rarefaction pulse. Following immediately behind the
Sound is a mechanical three dimensional and compression pulse, the rarefaction pulse also travels
longitudinal wave that is created by a vibrating source away from the prong with the speed of sound.
such a guitar string, the human vocal cords, the A B
prongs of a tuning fork or the diaphragm of a
loudspeaker. Being a mechanical wavs, sound needs . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
a medium having properties of inetia and elasticity . . . .v. . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
for its propagation. Sound waves propagate in any . . . . . . . . .
medium through a series of periodic compressions rarefaction compression
pulse pulse
and rarefactions of presure, which is produced by
the vibrating source. A longitudinal wave in a fluid is described either in
Consider a tuning fork producing sound waves. tems of the longitudal displacements suffered by the
particles of the medium.
A B
y  A sin t y  A sin ( t – x / v)
. .
. . . . . . .
. .
. . . . . . .
. .
. . . . . . .
. .
. . . . . . . –A (0,0) A y A
. .
. . . . . . .
. .
. . . . . . . v
normal atmospheric
x
pressure
Undisturbed tuning fork
Consider a wave going in the x-direction in a fluid.
Suppose that at a time t, the particle at the
undistrubed position x suffers a displacement y in Consider a longitudinal wave propagating in positive

the x-direction. x-direction as shown in figure. Figure shows a
segmentAB of the medium of width dx. In this
 x
y = A sin   t – v  ...(i) medium let a longitudinal wave is propagating whose
 
equation is given as
Position of any particle from origin at any time = x y = A sin (t – kx) ...(1)
+y Where y is the displacement of medium particle
x = Distance of the mean position of the particle situated at a distance x from the origin, along the
from the origin. direction of propagation of wave. In figure shown
y = Displacement of the particle from its mean AB is the medium segment whose a medium
position. particle is at position x = x and B is at x = x +dx at
General Equation : an instant. If after some time t medium particle at
A reaches to a point A' which is displaced by y and
(0,0)  y = A sin (t + )
the medium particle at b reaches to point B which
(0,x)  y = A sin [(t – x/v ) + 
is at a displacmenet y + dy from B. Here dy is
Displacement wave y = A sin (t – kx + ) given by equation (3.116) as
• If we fix x = x0 then we are dealing with the particle dy = – Ak cos (t – kx) dx
whose mean position at distance x0 from origin & Here due to displacement of section AB to AB
this particle is performin SHM of amp. A with time the change in volume of it's section is given as
period T phase difference = – kx +  dV = – S dy
[S  Area of cross-section]
3. COMPRESSION WAVES = SA k cos (t – kx) dx
When a longitudinal wave propagated in a gaseous The volume of section AB is V = S dx
medium, it produces compression and rarefaction Thus volume strain in section AB is
in the medium periodically. The region where
dV –SAk cos(t – kx)dx
compression occurs, the pressure is more than the  or
V Sdx
normal pressure of the medium. Thus we can also
describe longitudinal waves in a gaseous medium dV
as pressure waves and these are also termed as  –Ax cos(t – kx)
V
compression waves in which the pressure at
If B is the bulk modulus of the medium, then the
different point of medium also varies periodically
with their displacements. Let us discuss the excess pressure in the section AB can be given as
propagation of excess pressure in a medium in dV 
longitudinal wave analytically. P = – B   ...(2)
 V 
y y+dy P = BAk cos (t – kx)
or P = P0cos(t – kx) ...(3)
Here P0 is the pressure amplitude at a medium
particle at position x from origin and P is the excess
pressure at that point. Equation shown that excess
A A' B B' varies periodically at every point of the medium with
X
dx pressure amplitude P0, which is given as
x=x x=x+dx
2
P0 = BAk = AB ...(4)

SOUND WAVES 3.3
Equation shown is also termed as the equation of

dV d
pressure wave in gaseous medium. We can also or –
see that the pressure wave differs in phase is /2 V 
from the displacement wave and pressure maxima Substituting in Eq. (i), we get
occurs where the displacement is zero and
displacement maxima occur where the pressure is (dP) dp  1 
d   2   2
at its normal level. Remembers that pressure B v B v 
maxima implies that the presure at a point is pressure Or this can be written as,
amplitude times more or less then the normal
pressure level of the medium.  1
  . P  2  P
B v
EXAMPLE 1 So, this relation relates the pressure equation with
A sound wave of wavelenth 40 cm travels in air. If the density equation. For example, if
the difference between the maximum and minimum P = (P)m sin (kx – t)
pressures at a given point is 2.0 × 10–3 N/m2, find then  = ()msin (kx – t)
the amplitude of vibration of the particles of the
medium. The bulk modulus of air is 1.4 × 105 N/m2  ( P)m
where, ()m = .( P) m 
B v2
Sol. The pressure amplitude is
Thus, density equation is in phase with the pressure
2.0  10 –3 N / m 2 equation and this is 90° out of phase with the
p0   10 –3 N / m 2
2 displacement equation.
The displacement amplitudes s0 is given by
p0 = B k s0 3.1 Velocity and Acceleration of particle:
General equation of wave is given by
p0 p
or, s0   0
Bk 2B y = A sin (t – kx)
y
10–3 N / m2  (40  10 –2 m) 100 v =  t = A  cos (t – kx) ...(1)
  Å  6.6Å
2    14  104 N / m 2 7
2 y
a = = – A2 sin (t – kx) ...(2)
Density Wave  t2
In this section we will find the relation between y

pressure wave and density wave.  –Ak cos( t – kx) ...(3)
x
According to definition of bulk modulus (B),
y
 dp  Here  x = slope of (y, x) curve Now again
B = – 
 dV / V  differentiate eq. – 3
mass 2 y
Further, Volume =  –Ak 2 sin( t – kx) ...(4)
density  x2
from eq. (2) & (4)
m
or V= 2 y 2 y
  v2 2
2
t x
m V
or dV = – 2
.d  – .d
 
4. VELO CITY OF S O UND / If Young's modulus of the material of medium is Y,

LONGITUDINAL WAVES IN we have
SOLIDS Stess S1
Young's Modulus Y = 
Consider a section AB of medium as shown in Strain E
figure(a) of cross-sectional area S. Let A and B be
two cross section as shown. Let in this medium F/S
From equation (1) and (2), we have Y 
sound propagation is from left to right. If wave dy / dx
source is at origin O and when it oscillates, the
oscillations at that point propagate along the rod. dy
or F  YS ...(3)
dx
velocity of sound
A B If net force acting of secting AB is dF then it is
given as
dF = dma ...(4)
Where dm is the mass of section AB and a be its
O x dx acceleration, which can be given as for a medium of
(a) density .
A' B'
d2 y
dm = Sdx and a=
dt 2
d2 y
O x+y dx+dy From equation (4), we have dF = (Sdx)
dx 2
(b)
Here we say an elastic wave has propagated along dF d2 y

or  S 2 ...(5)
the rod with a velocity determined by the physical dx dt
properties of the medium. Due to oscillations say a From equation (3) on differentiating w.r. to x, we
force F is developed at every point of medium which can write
produces a stress in rod and is the cause of strain or
propagation of disturbance along the rod. This stress dF d 2y
 YS 2 ...(6)
at any cross-sectional area can be given as dx dt
F From equation (5) and (6) we get

Stress S1 = ...(1)
S
d2 y  Y  d 2y
If we consider the section AB of medium at a general   ....(7)
dx 2    dx 2
instant of time t. The end A is at a distance x from O
and B is at a distance x + dx from O. Let in time dt Equation (7) is the differential form of wave
due to oscillations, medium particles at a are equation, comparing it with previous equation we
displaced along the length of medium by y and those get the wave velocity in the medium can be given
at B by y + dy. The resulting position of section and as
A and B shown in figure (b), Here we can say
that the section AB is deformed (elongated) by a Y
v
length dy. Thus strain produced in it is 
dy Similar to the case of a solid in fluid, instead of

Strain in section AB E ...(2) Young's Modulus we use Bulk modulus of the
dx
SOUND WAVES 3.5
medium hence the velocity of longitudinal waves in From the expression in equation (1) if we find the
a fluid medium is given as sound velocity in air at normal temperature and
atompsheric pressure we have
B Normal atmospheric pressure is P = 1.01 × 105 Pa
v

Density of air at NTP is  = 1.293 kg/m3
Where B is the Bulk modulus of medium.
P
For a gaseous medium bulk modulus is defined as Now from equation (1) v=

dp dP
B or B  –V
(–dV / V) dV 1.01  105
 v  = 279.45 m/s
1.293
But the experimental value of veloicty of sound

4.1 Newton's Formula for velocity of determined from various experiments gives the
Sound in Gases velocity of sound at NTP, 332 m/s. Therefore there
Newton assumed that during sound propagation is a difference of about 52 m/s between the theoretical
temperature of medium remains constant hence the and experimental values. This large difference can
stated that propagation of sound in a gasesous not be attributed to the experimental errors. Newton
medium is an isothermal phenomenon, thus Boyal's was unable to explain error in his formula. This
law can be applied in the process. So for a section correction was explained by a French Scientist
of medium we use Laplace.
PV = constant
Differentiating we get 4.2 Laplace Correction
PdV + V dP = 0 Laplace explained that when sound waves
propagated in a gaseous medium. There is
dP compression and rarefaction in the particles of
or –V P
dV medium. Where there is compression, particles come
or bulk modulus of medium can be given as near to each other and are heated up, where there is
B = P (Pressure of medium) rarefaction, medium expends and there is fall of
temperature. Therefore, the temperature of medium
Newton found that during isothermal propagation
at every point does not remain constant so the process
of sound in a gaseous medium, bulk modulus of
of sound propagation is not isothermal. The total
medium is equal to the pressure of the medium,
quantity of heat of the system as a whole remains
hence sound velocity in a gaseous medium can be
constant. medium does not gain or loose any heat to
given as
the surrounding. Thus in a gaseous medium sound
B P propagation is an adiabatic process. For adiabatic
v  ...(1) process the relation in pressure and volume of a
 
section of medium can be given as
P RT PV = constant ...(1)

From gas law we have  ...(2)
 M
Cp
Here  = , ratio of specific heats of the medium.
Cv
RT
From (1) & (2) we have v  ...(3)
M Differentiating equation (1) we get,
dPV + V–1 dVP = 0
For a given gaseous medium , R and M remains

PdV
or dP +  =0 constant, thus velocity of sound is directly
dV
proportional to square root of absolute temperature
dP of the medium. Thus
or –V  P
dV
v T
Bulk modulus of medium B = P
If at two different temperatures T1 and T2, sound
velocities in medium are v1 and v2 then from above
Thus Laplace found that during adiabatic equation we have
propagation of sound, the Bulk modulus of gaseous
medium is equal to the product of ratio of specific v1 T1

heats and the pressure of medium. Thus velocity of v2 T2
sound propagation can be given as
B P 4.4 Effect of Pressure on Velocity of

v 
  Sound
We know form gas law
RT
From gas law v
M P RT

 M
From above equation we find sound velocity in air
at NTP, we have If temperature of a medium remains constant then
Normal atmospheric pressure 5
P = 1.01 × 10 Pa on changing pressure, density of medium
Density of air at NTP P = 1.293 kg/m3 P
proportionally changes so that the ratio remains

Cp
Ratio of specific heat of air    1.42
constant.
Cv
Hence if in a medium, T = constant
 1.42  1.01  105 P

 v   = 333.04 m/s Then, = constant
 1.293 
This value is in agreement with exerimental value.
P
Now at any temperature t°C velocity of sound vt Thus velocity of sound, v = = constant

1/ 2
R(273  t) R273  t 
=  1   Therefore, the velocity of sound in air or in a gas is
M M  273 
independent of change in pressure.
 t 
vt = v0 1   4.5 Effect of Humidity on Velocity of
 546 
Sound
4.3 Effect of Temperature on Velocity of The density of water vapour at NTP is 0.8 kg/m3
Sound whereas the density of dry air at NTP is 1.293 kg/3.
We have velocity of sound propagation in a gasous Therefore water vapour has a density less than the
medium as density of dry air. As atmospheric pressure remains
approximately same, the velocity of sound is more in
RT moist air then the velocity of sound in dry air.
v vmoist air > vdry air (from the previous equation)
M
SOUND WAVES 3.7
4.6 Effect of Wind on Velocity of Sound and intensity. Figure shows waveforms for a tuning
If wind is blowing in the direction of propagation of fork, a clarinet and a cornet playing the same note
sound, it will increase the velocity of sound, On the (fundamental frequency = 440 Hz) with equal
other hand if wave propagation is opposite to the loudness.
direction of propagation of wind, wave velocity is
p
decreased. If wind blows at speed v then sound
velocity in the medium can be given as t
  
v  vs  v w
 p
Where v s is the velocity of sound in still air..
t
5. APPEARANCE OF SOUND TO HUMAN

EAR p
The appearance of sound to a human ear is
t
characterised by three parameters (a) pitch (b)
loudness and (c) quality.
(a) Pitch and Frequency We differenatiate between the sound from a tabla
Pitch of a sound is that sensation by which we and that from a mridang by saying that they have
differentiate a buffalo voice, a male voice and a different quality.
female voice. We say that a buffalo voice is of low
pitch, a male voice has higher pitch and a female (d) Energy in sound Waves
voice has still higher pitch. This sensation primarly Pavg = 22f2A2 v
depends on the dominant frequency present in the Intensity = 22A2 f2 v
sound. Higher the frequency, higher will be the pitch
P  P0 cos( t – kx )
and vice versa.
(b) Loudness and Intensity P0
P0  Ak  A 
The loudness that we sense is related to the intensity K
of sound though it is not directly proportional to it. Intensity
Our perception of loudness is beter correlated with
the sound level measured in decibels (abbreviated 2 A2 v 2 P02 v 2 P0 2 v 3
  
as dB) and defined as follows. 2 2 2 k 2 2  22
 I 
  10log10   P02 v 2 .v P02.v
 
 I0  2 2 2 2 
where I is the intensity of the sound and I0 is a
constant reference intensity 10 –12 W/m2 The  
v  
reference intensity represents roughly the minimum  
intensity that is just audible at intermediate
frequencies. For I = I0 , the sound level  = 0. P02 V
I
2.
(c) Quality and Waveform
A sound generated by a source may contain a Note
number of frequency components in it. Different
frequency components have different amplitudes
and superposition of them results in the actual
waveform. The appearance of sound depends on
this waveform apart from the dominant frequency
Section B - Interference of waves, For constructive interference

Reflection and refraction
Inet = ( I1  I 2 )2
1. AN ALYT ICAL TR EATM ENT OF When I1 = I2 = I
INTERFERENCE OF WAVES
Inet = 4 I
S1 Anet = A1 + A2
x1
A1 sin(t  kx) y1  A1 sin(t  kx1) When superposing waves are in opposite phase, the
resultant amplitude is the difference of two
y 2  A 2 sin(t  kx2 ) amplitudes & Inet is minimum; this is known as
x2 destructive interference.
S2
A 2 sin(t  kx)
For Inet to be minimum,
cos  = – 1
Interference implies super position of waves.  = (2n + 1) 
Whenever two or more than two waves superimpose where n = {0,1,2,3,4,5...........}
each other at some position then the resutant
displacement of the particle is given by the vector 2 
x = (2n + 1)  x = (2n  1)
sum of the individual displacements.  2
Let the two waves coming from sources S1 & S2 be For destructive interference
y1 = A1 sin (t + kx1 )
Inet = ( I1 – I 2 )2
y2 = A2 sin (t + kx2) respectively.
If I1 = I2
Due to superposition
Inet = 0
ynet = y1 + y2
Anet = A1 – A2
ynet = A1 sin (t + kx1) + A2 sin (t + kx2)
Generally,
Phase difference between y1 & y2 = k(x2 – x1)
i.e.,  = k(x2 – x1) Inet = I1 + I2 + 2 I1I 2 cos
2 If I1 = I2 = I
As  = x (where x = path
 Inet = 2I + 2Icos
difference &  = phase difference)

Inet = 2I(1 + cos ) = 4Icos2
Anet = 2 2
A  A  2A1A2 cos  2
1 2
 A net 2  A12  A 22  2A1A 2 cos  ( I1  I 2 ) 2

Ratio of Imax & Imin =
( I1 – I 2 ) 2
 Inet = I1 + I2 + 2 I1I 2 cos (as I  A2)
When the two displacements are in phase, then the
resultant amplitude will be sum of the two amplitude
Note
& Inet will be maximum, this is known of constructive
interference.
For Inet to be maximum
cos = 1   = 2n where
n = {0,1,2,3,4,5...........}
2
x  2n  x = n

SOUND WAVES 3.9
Section C - Standing waves (organ pipes),

Resonance tube, Quink's tube, Note
Kundt's tube • Note that a pressure node in a standing wave
would correspond to a displacement antinode; and
1. LONGITUDINAL STANDING WAVES a pressure anti-node would correspond to a
Two longitudinal waves of same frequency and displacement node.
• (when we label eqn. (1) as SHM, what we mean
amplitude travelling in opposite directions interfere
that excess pressure at any point varies simple
to produce a standing wave. harmonically. if the sound waves were represented
If the two interfering waves are given by in terms of displacement waves, then the equation
of standing wave corresponding to (1) would be
p1 = p0 sin (t – kx) and
p2 =p0 sin (t + kx + ) 
s = s0' cos (t + )
then the equation of the resultant standing wave 2
would be given by

where s0' = 2s0 sin (kx + )
  2
p = p1 + p2 = 2p0cos (kx + ) sin (t + )
2 2 This can be easily observed to be an equation of
SHM. It represents the medium particles moving

 p = p0' sin (t + ) ...(1) simple harmonically about their mean position at x.
2
This is equation of SHM* in which the amplitude
2. REFLECTION OF SOUND WAVES
p0' depends on position as
Reflection of sound waves from a rigid boundary
 (e.g. closed end of an organ pipe) as analogous to
p0' = 2p0cos (kx + ) ...(2)
2 reflection of a string wave from rigid boundary;
Points where pressure remains permanently at its reflection accompanied by an inversion i.e. an abrupt
average value, i.e., pressure amplitude is zero is called phase change of p. This is consistent with the
a pressure node, and the condition for a pressure requirement of displacement amplitude of remains
node would be given by zero at the rigid end, since a medium particle at the
rigid end can not vibrate. As the excess pressure
p0' = 0
and displacement corresponding to the same sound
 wave vary by /2 in term of phase, a displacement
i.e. cos(kx  )  0
2 minima at the rigid end will be a point of pressure
maxima. This implies that the reflected pressure
  waves from the rigid boundary will have same phase
i.e. kx + = 2n ± , n = 0,,1,2.......
2 2 as the incident wave, i.e., a compression pulse is
Similarly points where pressure amplitude is reflected as a compression pulse and a rarefaction
maximum is called a pressure antinode and condition pulse is reflected as a rarefaction pulse
for a pressure antinode would be given by On the other hand, reflection of sound wave from a
p0' = ±2p0 low pressure region (like open end of an organ pipe)
is analogies to reflection of string wave from a free
 end. This point corresponds to a displacment
i.e. cos (kx + )=±1
2 maxima, so that the incident & reflected displacement
wave at this point must be in phase. This would
 imply that this point would be a minima for pressure
or (kx + ) = n, n = 0, 1, 2,.......
2 wave (i.e. pressure at this point remains at its average
value), and hence the reflected presure wave would

be out of phase by  with respect to the incident
wave. i.e. a compression pulse is reflected as a
rarefaction pulse and vice-versa.
3. WAVES IN A VIBRATING AIR COLUMN

Hollow pipes have long used for making musical l
sounds. A hollow pipe we call organ pipe. To
understand how these work, first we examine the
behaviour of air in a hollow pipe that is open at both
ends. If we blow air across one end, the disturbance
due to the moving air at that end propagates along
the pipe to the far end. When it reaches far end, a (a) (b) (c)
part of the wave is reflected, similar in the case when
Thus fundamental frequency of oscillations of
a wave is reflected along a string whose end point is closed organ pipe of length l be given as
free to move. Since the air particles are free to move
at the open end, the end point is an antinode. if one  
n1 =  ...(2)
end of the pipe is closed off, the the air is not free to  4l
move any further in that direction and closed end Similarly first overtone of closed pipe vibrations is
becomes a node. now the resonant behaviour of shown in figure (b) here wavelength  and pipe
pipe is completely changed. Similar in the case of length l are related as
string, here also all harmonic frequencies are possible 3 '
and resonance may take place it the frequency of l ...(3)
4
external source matches with any of the one
harmonic freuquency of pipe. Let us discuss in detail. 4l
or ' 
3
(i) Vibration of Air in a Closed Organ Pipe
When a tuning fork is placed near the open end of a Thus frequency of first overtone oscillatinos of a
closed organ pipe of length l can be given as
pipe. The air in the pipe oscillates with the same
frequency as that of tuning fork. Here the open end  3
n2 =  ...(4)
should be an antinode and closed and should be a  ' 4l
node for perfect reflection of waves from either end = 3n1
or for formation of stationary waves. Since one end This is three times the fundamental frequency thus
is a node and other is an antinode, the lowest after fundamental only third harmonic frequency
frequency (largest wavelength) vibration has no other exist for a closed organ pipe at which resonance can
nodes or antinodes between ends as shown in take place or stationary waves can be formed in it.
figure(a). This is the fundamental (minimum) Similarly next overtone, second overtone is shown
frequency at which stationary waves can be formed in figure(c). Here the wavelength  and pipe length
in a closed organ pipe. Thus if the wavelength is  l are related as
then we can see from figure (a), which shows the
5 " 4l
displacement wave of longitudinal waves in the l or " 
4 5
closed organ pipe.
Thus the frequency of second overtone oscillation
 of a closed organ pipe of length l can be given as
l= ...(1)
4
 5
n3 =   5n1
or =4l  '' 4l
SOUND WAVES 3.11
This is fifth harmonic frequency of fundamental l =  ....(2)

oscillations. Thus here resonant frequency for first overtone is
(2n – 1)v given as
In general f =
4 v v
n2   ...(3)
Here frequency of oscillation is called (2n – 1)th ' l
harmonic and (n – 1)th overtone
Which is second harmonic of fundamental
From above analysis it is clear that the resonant frequency. Similarly as shown in figure (c), in second
frequecies of the closed organ pipe are only odd overtone oscillations, the wavelength '' of sound is
harnomics of the fundamental frequency. releated to the length of pipe as
3 ''
(ii) Vibration of Air in Open Organ Pipe l ...(4)
2
Figure shown the resonant oscillations of an open
organ pipe. The least frequency at which an open 2l
organ pipe resonates is the one with longest or  ''  ...(5)
3
wavelength when at both the open ends of pipe
antinodes are formed and there is one node is Thus be frequency of second overtone oscillations
between as shown in figure (a). In this situation the of an open organ pipe can given as
wavelengths of sound in air  is related to length of
v 3v
organ pipe as n3   ...(6)
 '' 2l
 = 3n1 ...(7)
l= or =2l ...(1)
2
Which is third harmonic of fundamental frequency.
Thus the fundamental frequency of organ pipe can
be given as nv
In General f =
2
v v
n1  
 2l we can say frequency of oscillation is called nth
harmonic and (n – 1)th overtone.
The above analysis shown that resonant frequencies
for formation of stationary waves includes all the
possible harmonic frequencies for an open organ pipe.
(iii) End correction

As mentioned earlier the displacment antinode at an
l
open end of an organ pipe lies slightly outside the
open lend. The distance of the antinode from the
open end is called end correction and its value is
given by
e = 0.6 r
(a) (b) Np A0 Np
(c)
2r
Similarly next higher frequency at which the open P
organ pipe resonate is shown in figure (b) which we
call first overtone. Here the wavelength ' is related 6r
to the length of pipe as e=0
where r = radius of the organ pipe. column be I1. If water level is further decreased,
with end correction, the fundamental frequency of again maximum sound intensity is observed when
a closed pipe (fe) and an open argon pipe (f0) will be water leel is at another node i.e. at a length l2 as
given by shown in figure. Here if we find two successive
resonance lengths l 1 and l 2 , we can get the
v v wavelength of the wave as
fe  and f0 
4(  0.6r) 2(   1.2r)

l2 – l1 = or   2(l2 – l1 )
2
(iv) Resonance Tube Thus sound velocity in air can be given as
This an apparatus used to determine velocity of
sound in air experimentally and also to compare v  n 0   2n0 ( l2 – l1 )
frequncies of two tuning forks.
EXAMPLE 2
A tube of certain diameter and of length 48 cm is
open at both ends. Its fundamental frequency of
resonance is found to be 320 Hz. The velocity of
sound in air is 320 m/s. Estimate the diameter of the
tube. One end of the tube is now closed. Calculate
the lowest frequency of resonance for the tube.
Sol. The displacement curves of longitudinal waves in a
tube open at both ends is shown in figure (a) and (b).
48 cm
A B
N
(a)
A N
(b)
shown figure the setup of a resonance the
experiment. There is a long tube T in which initially Let r be the radius of the tube. We know the
water is filled upto the top and the eaer level can be antinodes occur slightly outside the tube at a distance
change by moving a reservoir R up and down. 0.6 r from the tube end.
A tunning fork of known frequency n0 is struck The distance between two antinodes is given by
gently on a rubber pad and brought near the open

and tube T due to which oscillations are transferred  48  2  0.6r
2
to the air coloumn in the tube above water level.
Now we gradually decrease the water level in the v 32000
tube. This air column behaves like a closed organ We have =  = 100 cm
n 320
pipe and the water level as closed end of pipe. As
or 50 = 48 + 1.2r
soon as water level reaches a position where there
is a node of corresponding stationary wave, in air 2
column, resonance takes place and maximum sound or r= = 1.67 cm
1.2
intensity is detected. Let at this position length of air
Thus diameter of the tube is D = 2r = 3.33
SOUND WAVES 3.13
When one end is closed, then From equation (1), (2) and (3), we get
 
= 48 + 0.6r = 48 + 0.6 × 1.67 = 49 or x= ...(4)
4 2
or  = 4 × 49 = 196 cm Thus by experiment we get the wavelength of sound
as for two sucessive points of constructive
v 32000
Now n=  = 163.3 Hz interference, the path difference must be . As the
 196
tube B is pulled out by x, this introduces a path
difference 2x in the path of sound wave through
(v) Quink's Tube tube B. If the frequency of the source is known, n0,
the velocity of sound in the air filled in tube can be
This is an apparatus used to demonstrate the
given as
phenomenon of interference and also used to
measure velocity of sound in air. This is made up of v = n0 = 2n0x ...(5)
two U-tubes A and B as shown in figure. Here the
tube B can slide in and out from the tube A. There
EXAMPLE 3
are two openings P and Q in the tube A. At opening
In a large room a person recieves direct sound waves
P, a tuning fork or a sound source of known
from a source 120 m away from him. he also
frequency n0 is placed and at the other opening a
receives waves from the same source which reach
detector is placed to detect the resultant sound of
him, being reflected from the 25m high ceiling at a
interference occurred due to superposition of two
point halfway between them. For which wavelength
sound waves coming from the tubes A and B.
will these two sound waves interfere constructivity?
Sol. As shown in figure for reflection from the ceilling
Path SCP = SC + CP = 2SC
[As i = r, SC = CP]
A
or Path SCP = 2 602  252 = 130 cm

So path differene between interfering waves
along path SCP, and SP,
Initially tube B is adjusted so that detector detects x = 130 –120 = 10 m
a maximum. At this instant if length of paths covered C
by the two waves from P to Q from the side of A
and side of B are l1 are l2 respectively then for i r
constructive interference we must have
l2 – l2 = N ...(1)
If now tube B is further pulled out by a distance x
S P
so that next maximum is obtained and the length of *
Source *
Detector
path from the side of B is l2' then we have
Now for consructive interfernece at P.
l2'  l2  2x ...(2) x = n. i.e., 10 = n
Where x is the displacement of the tube. For next 10

or = with n = 1, 2, 3 .........
constructive interference of sound at point Q, we have n
l2' – l1  (N  1) ..(3) i.e.  = 10 m, 5m, (10/3) m and so on
EXAMPLE 4 Sol. The situation of shown in figure

Figure shown a tube structure in which a sound
1m 1m
signal is sent from one end and is received at the
othe end. The semicircular part has a radius of 20.0
cm. The frequency of the sound source can be P1 *S1
Q *S2
P2
varied electronically between 1000 and 4000 Hz. 2m
Find the frequencies at which maxima of intensity
are detected. The speed of sound in air = 340 m/s. The oscillations y1 and y2 have amplitudes A1 = 0.03
m and A2 = 0.02 respectively.
 1
The frequency of both sources in n =  = 0.5 Hz
2 2
Sol. The sound wave reaches detector by two paths
simultaneously be straight as well as semicircular v 1.5
track. The wave through the straight path travels a Now wavelength of each wave  =  = 3.0 m
n 0.5
distance l1 = 2 × 20 cm and the wave through the
curved part travles a distane l2 =  (20 cm) = 62.8 (a) The path difference for all points P2 to the right of
cm before they meet again and travel to the receiver. S2 is
The path difference between the two waves received  = (S1P2 – S2P2) = S1S2 = 2m
is, therefore,
2
l = l2 – l2 = 62.8 cm – 40 cm = 22.8 cm = 0.228 m Phase difference    Path difference

v 340
The wavelength of either wave is  . For 2 4
n n   2.0 
3 3
constructive interfernece, l = N, where N is an
integer. The resultant amplitude for this point is given by
R  A12  A 22  2A1A 2 cos 

 340 
or, 0.228  N  
 n 
 (0.03)2  (0.02) 2  2  0.03  0.02  cos(4  / 3)
340  Solving we get R = 0.0265 m

or, n = N   = N(1491.2) Hz = N(1490) Hz
 0.228  (b) The path difference for all point P, to the left of S1
Thus, the frequencies within the specific range  = (S2P – S1P) = S1S2 = 2.0 m
which cause maxima of intensity are 1490 Hz and Hence the resultant amplitude for all points to the
2980 Hz. left of S1 is also 0.0265 m
(c) For a point Q, between S1 and S2, the path difference
is zero i.e.,  = 0. Hence constructive interference
EXAMPLE 5
take place at Q, thus amplitude at this point is
Two sources S1 and S2, separated by 2.0 m, vibrate
maximum and given as
according to equation y1 = 0.03 sin  t and y2 =
0.02 sin t where y1, y2 and t are in M.K.S unit. R  A12  A 22  2A1A 2
They send out waves of velocity 1.5m/s. Calculate
= A1 + A2 = 0.03 + 0.02 = 0.05 m
the amplitude of the resultant motion of the particle
co-linear with S1 and S2 and located at a point (a) to
the right of S2(b) to the left of S2 and (C) in the
middle of S1 and S2.
SOUND WAVES 3.15
EXAMPLE 6 
 = (2n + 1) or
Two point sources of sound are placed at a distance 2
d and a detector moves on a straight line parallel to dx  (2n  1)D
the line joining the sources as shown in figure. at a  (2n  1) or x=
D 2 2d
distane D away from sources. Initially Detector is
situated on the line so that it is equidistant from both EXAMPLE 7
the sources. Find the displacement of detertor when Two coherent narrow slits emitting of wavelength
it detects n th maximum sound and also find its  in the same phase are placed parallel to each
displacement when it detects nth minimum sound. other at a small separation of 2. the sound is
detected by moving a detector on the screen S at a
distance D (>> ) from the slit S1 as shown in figure.
S1 *
Find the distance x such that the intensity at P is
equal to the intensity at O.
d Detector
(D)
S2 (D>>d) *P
*
x
2
Sol. The situation is shown in figure * * O
S1 S2
D
S1 * D S
x

 Sol. When detector is at O, we can see that the path
d O
D differnece in the two waves reaching O is d = 2
S2 Q thus at O detector receives a maximum sound.
* When it reaches P and again there is a maximum
sound detected at P the path difference between
Let us consider the situation when detector move two waves must  =. Thus shown figure the path
by a distance x as shown. Let at this position the difference at P can be given as
path diference between the waves  = S1P – S2P ~– S1Q
from S1 and S2 to detector by  then we have
= d cos  = 2 cos 
 = S2D – S1D ~– S2Q [Where S 1Q is And we have at point P, path difference  = ,
perpendicular on line S2D] Thus
Here if  is small angle as D >> d, we have
x
S2Q = d sin  ~– d tan = d *P
D
Thus at the position of detector, path deference is Q x
dx 
= ....(1) * * O
D S1 d  2 S2
The expression for path difference in equation (1) is
an important formula for such problems. Students are D
advised to keep this formula in mind for future use.
When detector was at point O, path difference was  = 2 cos  = 
zero and it detects a maxima, now if detector detects
1
nth maximum then its path difference at a distance or, cos  =
2
x from O can be given as

dx n D or, =
=n or = n  or x= 3
D d
Similarly if detector detects nth minima then the path Thus the value of x can be written as x = D
difference between two waves at detector can be 
given as tan  = D tan  3  = 3 D
 
EXAMPLE 8 –1 1 –1 2
quadrant at   cos and  = cos at which
Figure shown two coherent sources S1 and S2 which 3 3
emit sound of wavelength  in phase. The separation constructive interference takes place. Thus there
between the sources is 3. A ciruclar wire of large are total twelve points on circle at which maxima
radius is placed in such a way that S1S2 lies in its occurs.
plane and the middle point of S1S2 is at the centre
of the wire. Find the angular position  on the (vi) Vibrations of Clamped Rod
wire for which constructive interference takes We have discussed the resonant vibrations of a
place.
string clamped at two ends. Now we discuss the
ocillations of a rod clamped at a point on its length
as shown in figure. Figure shows a rod AB clamped
at its middle point. If we gently hit the rod at its one
 end, it begin to oscillate and in the natural oscillations
the rod vibrates at its lowest frequency and
S1 S2 maximum wavelength, which we call fundamental
mode of oscillations. With maximum wavelength
when transverse stationary waves setup in the rod,
the free ends vibrates as antinodes and the clamped
end a node as shown in figure. Here if  be the
B wavelength of the wave, we have
P

l= or  =2l
2
 C
C A
S1 S2
Sol.
d  3 A B
l
D
Thus the frequency of fundamental oscillations of
From previous question, we can say that for a point
a rod damped at mid point can be given as
P on the circle shown in fiure shown. The path
difference in the two waves at P is
v I Y
 = S1P – S2P = d cos  = 3 cos  n0   ...(1)
 2l 
We know for constructive interference at P. The
path difference must be an integral multiple of Where Y is the Young's modulus of the material of
wavelength . Thus for a maxima at P, we have rod and  is the density of the material of rod.
3 cos  = 0 ; 3 cos  =  ; Next higher frequency at which rod vibrates will be
3 cos  = 2 ; 3 cos  = 3 ; then one when wave length is decreased to a value
so that one node is inserted between mid point and
 –1 1
or, = or  = cos an end of rod as shown in figure
2 3
C
2
or  = cos–1 or =0 A B
3
There are four points A, B, C and D on circle at

which  = 0 or and there are two points in each l
2
SOUND WAVES 3.17
In this case if  be the wavelength of the waves in you blow must harder you hear the higher pitch of
rod, we have an overtone because the faster airsteam higher
frequencies in the exciting disturbance. This sound
3 2l
l= or  ...(2) effect can also be achieved by increasing the air
2 3
pressure to an organ pipe.
Thus in this case the oscillation frequency of rod
can be given as
(viii) Kundt's Tube
v 3 Y This is an apparatus used to find velocity of sound
n1    3n 0 ...(3)
 2l  in a gaseous medium or in different materials. It
consists of a glass tube as shown in figure. one end
This is called first overtone frequency of the damped
of which a piston B is fitted which is attached to a
rod or thid harmonic frequency. Similarly, the next
wooden handle H and can be moved inside and
higher freqnecy of oscillation i.e. second overtone
outside the tube and fixed, the rod M of the required
of the oscillating rod can be shown in figure shown.
material is fixed at clamp C in which the velocity of
Here is  be the wavelength of the wave then it can
sound is required, at one end of rod a disc A is fixed
be given as
as shown.
5 2l
l or  ...(4)
2 5
C
A B
l In tube air is filled at room temperature and a thin

Thus the frequency of oscillation of rod can be given as layer of lycopodium powder is put along the length
of the tube. It is a very fine powder particles of
v 5 Y which can be displaced by the air particles also.
n2    5n 0 ..(5)
 2l 
When rod M is gently rubbed with a resin cloth or hit
Thus the second overtone frequency is the fifth gently, it starts oscillating in fundamental mode as
harmonic of the fundamental oscillation frequency shown in figure, frequency of which can be given as
of rod. We can also see from the above analysis
v 1 Y 
that the resonant freqencies at which stationary n rod   [As 0 = ]
 2 l0  2
waves are setup in a damped rod are only odd
harmonics of fundamental frequency.
Thus when an external source of frequency
matching with any of the harmonic of the damped
rod then stationary waves are setup in the rod.
(vii) Natural Oscillation of Organ Pipes

Note
When we initiate some oscillations in an organ pipe,
which harmonics are excited in the pipe depends on
how initial disturbance is produced in it. For example,
if you gently blow across the top of an organ pipe it
resonates softly at its fundamental frequency. But if
Section D - Beat's, Doppler's effect (Sound &  n – n2 

light) R  2A cos 2   1 t ...(5)
 2 
1. BEATS Here R becomes maximum when

When two sources of sound that have almost the
 n – n2 
same frequency are sounded together, an interesting cos 2   1  t  1
 2 
phenomenon occurs. A sound with a frequency
average of the two is heard and the loudness of  n – n2 
or 2  1  t  N [N  I]
sound repeatedly grows and then decays, rather than  2 
being constant. Such a repeated variation in
amplitude of sound are called 'beats". N
or t
n1 – n 2
If the frequency of one of the source is changed,
there is a corresponding change in the rate at which or at time
the amplitude varies. This rate is called beat
fequency. As the frequencies come close together, 1 2
t  0, , ,.........
n1 – n 2 n1 – n 2
the beat frequency becomes slower. A musician can
tune a guitar to another source by listening for the At all the above time instants the sound of maximum
beats while increasing or decreasing the tension in loudness is heard, similarly we can find the time
each string, eventually the beat frequency becomes instans when the loudness of sound is minimum, it
very low so that effectively no beats are heard, and occurs when
the two sources are then in tune.
 n – n2 
We can also expalin the phenomenon of beat cos 2   1 t  0
 2 
mathematically. Let us consider the two superposing
waves have frequencies n 1 and n 2 then their
 n – n2  
respective equations of oscillation are or 2  1  t  (2N  1) [N  I]
 2  2
y1 = A sin 2n1t ...(1)
and y2 = A sin 2n2t ...(2) 2N  1
or t
2(n1  n 2 )
On superposition at a point, the displacement of the
medium particle is given as or at time instants
y = y1 + y2 1 3
t , ,.......
y = A sin 2n1t + A sin 2n2t 2(n1 – n 2 ) 2(n1 – n 2 )
 n – n2   n1  n 2  Here we can see that these time instants are exactly

y  2A cos 2   1  t sin 2   t ...(3)
 2   2  lying in the middle of the instans when loudest sound
is heard. Thus on superposition of the above two
 n  n2  frequencies at a medium particle, the sound will be
y  R sin 2  1 t ...(4)
 2  increasing, decreasing, again increasing and decreasing
There equation (4) gives the displacement of medium and so on. This effect is called beats. Here the time
particle where susperposition takes place, it shows between two successive maximum or minimum
that the particle executes SHM with frequency sounds is called beat period, which is given as
Beat Period TB = time between two successive
n1  n 2
, average of the two superposing maxima = time between two successive minima
2
frequencies and with amplitude R which varies with 1

time, given as n1 – n 2
SOUND WAVES 3.19
Thus beat frequency or number of beats heard per motion relative to each other, the frequency of the
second can be given as sound heard by the listener is not the same as the
source frequency. Lets discuss the Doppler effect
1
fB   n1 – n 2 in detail for different cases.
TB
The superposition of two waves of slightly different

(i) Stationary Source and Stationary
frequencies is graphically shown in figure. The
Observer
resulting envelope of the wave formed after
Figure shown a stationary sources of frequency n0
superposition is also shown in figure (b). Such a
which produces sound waves in air of wavelength
wave when propagates, produces "beat" effect at
0 given as
the medium particles.
v
0 
n 0 [v = speed of sound in air]
0  v
n0 v
*
S* Observer
Source
(n0 Hz)
Although sound waves are longitudinal, here we

represent sound weaves by the transverse
displacement curve as shown in figure to understand
the concept in a better way. As source produces
waves, these waves travel towards, stationary
observer O in the medium (air) with speed v and
(i) Echo
wavelength 0. As observer is at rest here it will
The repetition of sound produced due to reflection observe the same wavelength 0 is approaching it
by a distant extended surface like a different, hill with speed v so it will listen the frequency n given
well, building etc. is called an echo. The effect of as
sound on human ear remains for approximately one
tenth of a second. If the sound is reflected back in v
n  n0 [same as that of source]...(1)
a time less then 1/10 of a second, no echo is heard. 0
Hence human ears are not able to distinguish a beat This is why when a stationary observer listends the
frequency of 10 Hz or more than 10 Hz. sound from a stationary source of sound, it detects
the same frequency sound which the source is
2. DOPPLER'S EFFECT producting. Thus no Doppler effect takes place if
When a car at rest on a road sounds its high there is no relative motion between source and
frequency horn and you are also standing on the observer.
road near by, you'll hear the sound of same frequency
it is sounding but when the car approaches you with (ii) St atio nary Sou rce and Moving
its horn sounding, the pich (frequency) of its sound Observer
seems to drop as the car passes. This phenomenon Figure shown the case when a stationary sources
was first described by an Austrain Scientist Christien of frequency n0 produces sound waves which have
Doppler, is called the Doppler effect, He explained wavelength in air given as
that when a source of sound and a listener are in
v  1 
0 
n0 is  n  sec and in this duration source emits one
 0 
v wavelength 0 in the direction of propagation of

0 
n0
v waves with speed v, but in this duratin the source
v0
*
S
O
Observer
 1 
Source will also move forward by a distance vs  n  . Thus
(n0 Hz)  0
the effective wavelength of emitted sound in air is

These waves travel toward moving observer with
slightly compressed by this distance as shown in
velocity v0 towards, the source. When sound waves
figure. This is termed as apparent wavelength of
approach observer, it will receive the waves of
sound in medium (air) by the moving source. This
wavelength 0 with speed v + v0 (relative speed).
is given as
Thus the frequency of sound heard by observer can
be given as Apparent wavelength
Apparent frequency  1 
 ap   0 – v s   ...(1)
 n0 
v  v 0 v  v0  v  v0 
nap =   n0   ...(2)
0  v  v 
  0n 0 – v s v – vs
 n0   
n0 n0
Similarly we can say that if the obsever is receding Now this wavelength will approach observer with
away from the source the apparent frequency heard speed v ( O is at rest). Thus the frequency of sound
by the observer will be given as heard by observer can be given as
 v – v0  Apparent frequecy
n ap  n 0   ...(3)
 v 
v v  v 
n ap    n0   ...(2)
(iii) Mo ving Sou rce and Stat iona ry  ap (v – v s ) / n 0  v – vs 
Observer
Figure shows the situation when a moving source S Similarly if source is receding away from observer,
of frequency n0 produces sound waves in medium the apparent wavelength emitted by source in air
(air) and the waves travel toward observer with toward observer will be slightly expanded and the
velocity v. apparent frequency heard by the stationary observer
can be given as
0  v 
 ap v n ap  n 0   ...(3)
 v  vs 
A
S* S' *O
vs Observer (iv) Moving Source and Moving Observer
Source
(n0 Hz)
Let us consider the situation when both source and
 1
vs  
observer are moving in same direction as shown in
 n0  figure at speeds vs and v0 respectively.
0
Here if we carefully look at the initial situation when v
source starts moving with velocity vs as well as it vs
S* *O
starts producting waves. The period of one oscillation
SOUND WAVES 3.21
In this case the apparent wavelength emitted by

the source behind it is given as
reflected sound
v  vs
 ap 
n0
vc
Now this wavelength will approach the observer at
relative speed v + v0 thus the apparent frequency of
sound heard by the observer is given as
First we treat the stationary wall as stationary
v  v0  v  v0 
n ap   n0   ...(1) observer and car as a moving source of sound of
 ap  v  vs 
frequency n0. In this case the frequency received
By looking at the expression of apparent frequency by the wall is given as
given by equation, we can easily develop a general
relation for finding the apparent frequency heard by  v 
n1  n 0   ...(1)
a moving observer due to a moving source as  v – vc 
 v  v0 
Now wall reflects this frequency and behaves like
n ap  n 0   ...(2) a stationary source of sound of frequency n1 and
 v  vs 
car (driver) behave like a moving observer with
Here + and – signs are chosen according to the velocity vc. Here the apparent frequency heard by
direction of motion of source and observer. The sign the car driver can be given as
covention related to the motion direction can be
stated as :  v  vc   v   v  vc 
n ap  n1    n0    
 v   v – vc   v 
(i) For both source and observer v0 and vs are taken
in equation with –ve sign if they are moving in the
direction of v i.e. the direction of propagation of vv c
= n0  v – v  (2)
sound from source to observer.  c 
(ii) For both source and observer v0 and vs are taken Same problem can also be solved in a different
in equation (2) with +ve sign if they are moving in manner by using method of sound images. In this
the direction opposite to v i.e. opposite to the procedure we assume the image of the sound source
direction of propagation of sound from source to behind the reflector. In previous example we can
observer. explain this by situation shown in figure.
(v) Doppler Effect in Reflected Sound ve

vc
When a car is moving toward a stationary wall as
shown in figure. If the car sounds a horn, wave
travels towards the wall and is reflected from the Here we assume that the sound which is reflected
wall. When the reflected wave is heard by the driver, by the stationary wall is coming from the image of
it appears to be of relatively high pitch. If we wish car which is at the back of it and coming toward it
to measure the frequency of reflected sound then with velocity vc. Now the frequency of sound heard
the problem must be handled in two steps. by car driver can directly be given as
 v  vc 
nap = n0  v – v  ...(3)
 c 
This method of images for solving problems of (vii) Doppler's Effect when Source and
Doppler effect is very convenient but is used only Observer are not in Same Line of
for velocities of source and observer which are very Motion
small compared to the speed of sound and it should Consider the situation shown in figure. Two cars 1
not be used frequenctly when the reflector of sound and 2 are moving along perpendicular roads at speed
is moving. v1 and v2. When car - 1 sound a horn of frequency
n0, it emits sound in all directions and say car - 2 is
(vi) Doppler's Effect for Accelerated at the position, shown in figure. when it receives
Motion the sound. In such cases we use velocity
components of the cars along the line joining the
For the case of a moving source and a moving
source and observer thus the apparent frequency
observer, we known the apparent frequency
of sound heard by car-2 can be given as
observer can be given as
 v  v 2 cos 2 
 v  v0  n ap  n 0   ...(6.266)
n ap  n 0   ...(4)  v – v1 cos 1 
 v  vs 
Here v is the velocity of sound and v0 and vs are

the velocity of observer and source respectively.
When a source of observer has accelerated or
car-1
ratarded motion then in equation (4) we use that
value of v0 at which observer receies the sound
1 v1
and for source, we use that value of vs at which it
has emitted the wave. v2
The alternative method of solving this case is by

Car-2
the traditional method of compressing or expending
wavelength of sound by motion of source and using 2
relative velocity of sound with respect to observer

Note
SOUND WAVES 3.23
Section A - Equation of pressure wave, 4. A sound level I is greater by 3.0103 dB from another
Velocity, Newton's and laplace sound of intensity 10 nW cm–2. The absolute value
formula, Loudness and of intensity of sound level I in Wm–2 is :
intensity, Energy in sound (A) 2.5 × 10–4 (B) 2 × 10–4
waves –2
(C) 2.0 × 10 (D) 2.5 × 10–2
1. The elevation of a cloud is 60°above the horizon. A
thunder is heard 8 s after the observation of lighting. 5. How many times more intense is 90 dB sound than
The speed of sound is 330 ms–1. The vertical height 40 dB sound?
of cloud from ground is (A) 5 (B) 50
(C) 500 (D) 105
Cloud 6. The ratio of intensities between two coherent sound

sources is 4:1 The difference of loudness in dB
between maximum and minimum intensities when
they interfere in space is
60° (A) 10 log 2 (B) 20 log 3
Horizon (C) 10 log 3 (D) 20 log 2
(A) 2826 m (B) 2682 m 7. The velocity of sound in an ideal gas at temperature
T1 and T2 K are v1 and v2 respectively. If the root
(C) 2286 m (D) 2068 m
mean square velocity of the same gas at same
temperature are c1 and c2 then–
2. The ratio of speed of sound in neon to that in water
vapours at any temperature (when molecular weight v2
(A) c2 = c1 (v2/v1) (B) c2 = c1 v1
of neon is 2.02 × 10–2 kg mol–1 and for water vapours
is 1.8 × 10–2 kg mol–1)
(A) 1.06 (B) 1.60 v1
(C) c2 = c1 (v1/v2) (D) c2 = c1 v2
(C) 6.10 (D) 15.2
3. A Firecracker exploding on the surface of a lake is 8. The speed of sound in a medium depends on-
heard as two sounds a time interval t apart by a man (A) the elastic property but not on the inertia property
on a boat close to water surface. Sound travels with (B) the inertia property but not on the elastic property
a speed u in water and a sped v in air. The distance (C) the elastic property as well as the inertia property
from the exploding firecracker to the boat is (D) neither the elastic property nor the inertia
property
uvt t (u  v )
(A) (B)
uv uv
9. At a pressure of 105 N/m2 the volume strain of water
t (u  v ) uvt is 5 x 10–5. Calculate the speed of sound in water
(C) (D)
uv uv density of water is 1×103 kg/m3
(A) 2.828 × 103 m/s (B) 1.414 × 103 m/s
(C) 0.707 × 103 m/s (D) 4.2 × 103 m/s
Section B - Interference of waves, 14. The energy per unit area associated with a
Reflection and refraction progressive sound wave will be doubled if :
(A) the amplitude of the wave is doubled
10. When two waves with same frequency and constant
(B) the amplitude of the wave is increased by 50%
phase difference interfere,
(C) the amplitude of the wave is increased by 41%
(A) there is a gain of energy
(D) None of these
(B) there is a loss of energy
(C) the energy is redistributed and the distribution
15. Sound waves of frequency 660 Hz fall normally on
changes with time
a perfectly reflecting wall. The shortest distance from
(D) the energy is redistributed and the distribution the wall at which the air particle has maximum
remains constant in time amplitude of vibration is (velocity of sound in air is
330 m/s)
11. Sound waves from a tuning fork F reach a point P (A) 0.125 m (B) 0.5 m
by two separate routes FAP and FBP (when FBP is (C) 0.25 m (D) 2 m
greater than FAP by 12 cm there is silence at P). If
the difference is 24 cm the sound becomes maximum
16. Two loudspeakers L1 and L2 driven by a common
at P but at 36 cm there is silence again and so on. If
oscillator and amplifier, are arranged as shown. The
velocity of sound in air is 330 ms –1, the least
frequency of the oscillator is gradually increased
frequency of tuning fork is :
from zero and the detector at D records a series of
(A) 1537 Hz (B) 1735 Hz maxima and minima. If the speed of sound is 330
(C) 1400 Hz (D) 1375 Hz ms–1 then the frequency at which the first maximum
is observed is : L 40m
1
D
12. S1 and S2 are two sources of sound emitting sine (A) 165 Hz
waves. The two sources are in phase. The sound (B) 330 Hz
9m
emmited by the two sources interfere at point F. (C) 496 Hz
The waves of wavelength: (D) 660 Hz L2
2m 4m
S1 S2 F
17. Four waves are represented by y1 = A1 sin t,
(A) 1 m will result in constructive interference y2 = A2 sin (ty3 = A1 sin (2t and y4
= A2 sin (t– Interference will happen with–
2
(B) m will result in constructive interference (A) y1, y2 and y3 only (B) y1, y2 and y4 only
3
(C) y1 and y3 only (D) y1, y2, y3 and y4
(C) 4m will result in destructive interference
(D) All the above
18. There is a destructive interference between the two
waves of wavelength  coming from two different
13. Two waves of sound having intensities I and 4I
paths at a point. To get maximum sound or
interfere to produce interference pattern. The phase
constructive interference at that point, the path of
 one wave is to be increased by-
difference between the waves is at point A and 
2
 
at point B. Then the difference between the resultant (A) (B)
4 2
intensities at A and B is
(A) 2I (B) 4I 3
(C) (D) 
4
(C) 5I (D) 7I
SOUND WAVES 3.25
Section C - Standing waves (organ pipes), 24. A pipe’s lower end is immersed in water such that the
Resonance tube, Quink's tube, length of air column from the top open end has a certain
Kundt's tube length 25 cm. The speed of sound in air is 350 m/s.
19. An open organ pipe of length L vibrates in its The air column is found to resonate with a tuning fork
fundamental mode. The pressure variation is maximum of frequency 1750 Hz. By what minimum distance
(A) at the two ends should the pipe be raised in order to make the air column
resonate again with the same tuning fork
(B) at the middle of the pipe
(C) at distance L/4 inside the ends (A) 7 cm (B) 5 cm
(D) at distance L/8 inside the ends (C) 35 cm (D) 10 cm
20. At the closed end of an organ pipe : 25. A closed organ pipe has length ‘l’. The air in it is
(A) the displacement is zero vibrating in 3rd overtone with maximum displacement
(B) the displacement is maximum amplitude ‘a’. The displacement amplitude at
(C) the wave pressure is zero distance l / 7 from closed end of the pipe is :
(D) None of these (A) 0 (B) a
(C) a / 2 (D) none of these
21. A cylindrical tube, open at one end and closed at the
other, is in acoustic unison with an external source
26. An organ pipe P1 closed at one end vibrating in its
of frequency held at the open end of the tube, in its
first overtone. Another pipe P2 open at both ends is
fundamental note. Then
vibrating in its third overtone. They are in a
(A) the displacement wave from the source gets
resonance with a given tuning fork. The ratio of the
reflected with a phase change of  at the closed end
length of P1 to that of P2 is:
(B) the pressure wave from the source get reflected
without a phase change at the closed end (A) 8/3 (B) 3/8
(C) the wave reflected from the closed end again (C) 1/2 (D) 1/3
gets reflected at the open end
(D) All the above 27. In Quincke’s tube a detector detects minimum
intensity. Now one of the tube is displaced by 5 cm.
22. An open organ pipe of length L vibrates in second During displacement detector detects maximum
harmonic mode. The pressure vibration is maximum intensity 10 times, then finally a minimum intensity
(A) At the two ends (when displacement is complete). The wavelength
(B) at a distance L/4 from either end inside the tube of sound is:
(C) At the mid-point of the tube (A) 10/9 cm (B) 1 cm
(D) None of these (C) 1/2 cm (D) 5/9 cm
23. An open organ pipe of length l is sounded together

with another organ pipe of length l + x in their Section D - Beat's, Doppler's effect (Sound
& light)
fundamental tones (x << l). The beat frequency heard
will be (speed of sound is v) :
28. The number of beats heard per second if there are
vx vl2 three sources of frequencies (n – 1), n and (n+ 1) of
(A) 2 (B)
4l 2x equal intensities sounded together is:
(A) 2 (B) 1
vx vx 2
(C) (D) (C) 4 (D) 3
2l 2 2l
29. A tuning fork of frequency 280 Hz produces 10 beats 33. A detector is released from rest over a source of
per sec when sounded with a vibrating sonometer sound of frequency f0 = 103 Hz. The frequency
string. When the tension in the string increases slightly, observed by the detector at time t is plotted in the
it produces 11 beats per sec. The original frequency graph. The speed of sound in air is (g = 10 m/s2)
of the vibrating sonometer string is: f(Hz)
(A) 330 m/s
(A) 269 Hz (B) 291 Hz (B) 350 m/s 2000
(C) 270 Hz (D) 290 Hz (C) 300 m/s 1000
(D) 310 m/s 30 t(s)

30. The speed of sound in a gas, in which two waves
of wavelength 1.0 m and 1.02 m produce 6 beats
34. An observer starts moving with uniform acceleration
per second, is approximately :
‘a’ towards a stationary sound source of frequency
(A) 350 m/s (B) 300 m/s f. As the observer approaches the source, the
(C) 380 m/s (D) 410 m/s apparent frequency f’ heard by the observer varies
with time t as:
31. Consider two sound sources S1 and S2 having same
f f
frequency 100Hz and the observer O located
between them as shown in the fig. All the three are (A) (B)
moving with same velocity in same direction. The t t
beat frequency of the observer is
–1
f
–1
S1 30ms O 30ms S2 30ms–1 f'
(C) (D)
(A) 50 Hz (B) 5 Hz t
t
(C) zero (D) 2.5 Hz
32. A source S of frequency f0 and an observer O, 35. A source of sound S having frequency f. Wind is
moving with speeds v1 and v2 respectively, are blowing from source to observer O with velocity u.
moving away from each other. When they are If speed of sound with respect to air is C, the
separated by distance a (t = 0), a pulse is emitted by wavelength of sound detected by O is :
the source. This pulse is received by O at time t1
Cu C–u
then t1, is equal to (A) (B)
f f
a a
(A) v  v (B) v  v C(C  u) C
s 2 1 s (C) (D)
(C – u)f f
a a
(C) v  v (D) v  v  v
s 2 1 2 s
SOUND WAVES 3.27
Section A - Equation of pressure wave, 4. A person standing at a distance of 6 m from a source

Velocity, Newton's and laplace of sound receives sound wave In two ways, one
formula, Loudness and directly from the source and other after reflection
intensity, Energy in sound from a rigid boundary as shown in figure. The
waves maximum wavelength for which, the person Will
receive maximum sound intensity, is
1. The ratio of maximum to minimum intensity due to (A) 4 m S
5m
49 16
superposition of two waves is . Then the ratio of (B) m 6m
9 3
4m
the intensity of component waves is (C) 2 m
P
8
25 16 (D) m
(A) (B) 3
4 25
4 9 5. The displacement sound wave in a medium is given

(C) (D) by the equation Y = A cos (ax + bt) where A, a and
49 49
b are positive constants. The wave is reflected by
an obstacle situated at x = 0. The intensity of the
2. In a test of subsonic Jet flies over head at an altitude reflected wave is 0.64 times that of the incident
of 100m. The sound intensity on the ground as the wave. Tick the statement among the following that
Jet passes overhead is 160 dB. At what altitude should is incorrect.
the plane fly so that the ground noise is not greater (A) the wavelength and frequency of the wave are
than 120 dB. 2/a and b/2 respectively
(B) the amplitude of the reflected wave is 0.8 A
(A) above 10km from ground
(C) the resultant wave formed after reflection is y
(B) above 1 km from ground = A cos (ax + bt) + [–0.8 A cos (ax – bt)] and Vmax
(C) above 5 km from ground (maximum particle speed) is 1.8 bA
(D) above 8 km from ground (D) the equation of the standing wave so formed is
y = 1.6 A sin ax cos bt
Section B - Interference of waves,

6. Two interfering waves have the same wavelength,
frequency, and amplitude, They are traveling in the
same direction but are 90° out of phase. Compared
3. Three coherent waves of equal frequencies having
to the individual waves, the resultant wave will have
amplitude 10m, 4m and 7m respectively, arrive
the same.
at a given point with successive phase difference of
(A) amplitude and velocity but different wavelength
/2 the amplitude of the resulting wave in m is
(B) amplitude and wavelength but different velocity
given by
(C) wavelength and velocity but different amplitude
(A) 5 (B) 6 (D) amplitude and frequency but different velocity.
(C) 3 (D) 4
Section C - Standing waves (organ pipes), 12. For a certain organ pipe three successive resonance
Resonance tube, Quink's tube, frequencies are observed at 425 Hz, 595 Hz and
Kundt's tube 765 Hz respectively. If the speed of sound in air is
340 m/s, then the length of the pipe is
7. In a closed end pipe of length 105 cm, standing
waves are set up corresponding to the third overtone. (A) 2.0 m (B) 0.4 m
What distance from the closed end, amongst the (C) 1.0 m (D) 0.2 m
following, is a pressure Node?
(A) 20 cm (B) 60 cm
(C) 85 cm (D) 45 cm 13. In an organ pipe whose one end is at x = 0, the
3x
pressure is expressed by p  p0 cos sin 300 t
8. A closed organ pipe of radius r1 and an open organ 2
pipe of radius r2 and having same length L resonate where x is in meter and t in sec. The organ pipe can
when excited with a given tunning fork. Closed organ be
pipe resonates in its fundamental mode where as
(A) closed at one end, open at another with
open organ pipe resonates in its first overtone, then
length = 0.5 m
(A) r2 – r1 = L (B) r2 – r1 = L/2
(C) r2 – 2r1 = 2.5 L (D) 2r2 – r1 = 2.5 L (B) open at both ends, length = 1m
(C) closed at both ends, length = 2m
9. First overtone frequency of a closed organ pipe is (D) closed at one end, open at another with
equal to the first overtone frequency of an open
2
organ pipe. Further nth harmonic of closed organ length = m
3
pipe is also equal to the mth harmonic of open pipe,
where n and m are :
(A) 5, 4 (B) 7, 5 Section D - Beat's, Doppler's effect (Sound
(C) 9, 6 (D) 7, 3 & light)
10. A closed organ pipe of length 1.2 m vibrates in its 14. A closed organ pipe and an open pipe of same length
first overtone mode. The pressure variation is produce 4 beats when they are set into vibrations
maximum at : simultaneously. If the length of each of them were
(A) 0.8m from the open end twice their initial lengths, the number of beats
(B) 0.4 m from the open end produced will be
(C) at the open end (A) 2 (B) 4
(D) 1.0 m from the open end
(C) 1 (D) 8
11. Four open organ pipes of different lengths and

different gases at same temperature as shown in 15. The tuning forks A & B produce notes of
figure. Let fA, fB, fC and fD be their fundamental frequencies 256 Hz & 262 Hz respectively. An
unknown note sounded at the sametime as A
frequencies then : [Take  CO 2 = 7/5]
H2
produces beats. When the same note is sounded
(A) fA/ fB = 2 with B, beat frequency is twice as large. The
O2 N2 unknown frequency could be :
(B) f B / f C  72 / 28 l
CO2
2l /3
(A) 268 Hz (B) 250 Hz
(C) fC/fD = 11/ 28 l/2
l/3
(C) 260 Hz (D) none of these
(D) fD /fA = (A) (B) (C) (D)
76 /11
SOUND WAVES 3.29
16. A stationary sound source ‘s’ of frequency 334 Hz 19. Two trains move towards each other with the same
and a stationary observer ‘O’ are placed near a speed. Speed of sound is 340 ms–1. If the pitch of
reflecting surface moving away from the source with the tone of the whistle of one when heard on the
velocity 2m/sec as shown in the figure. If the velocity other changes by 9/8 times, then the speed of each
of the sound waves in air is V = 330 m/sec, the train is :
apparent frequency of the echo is
o s
v v
H
(A) 332 Hz (B) 326 Hz (A) 2 ms–1 (B) 40 ms–1

(C) 20 ms–1 (D) 100 ms–1
(C) 334 Hz (D) 330 Hz
20. An engine whistling at a constant frequency n0 and

17. A small source of sound moves on a circle as shown
moving with a constant velocity goes past a stationary
in fig. and an observer is sitting at O. Let at 1, 2 3
observer. As the engine crosses him, the frequency
be the frequencies heard when the source is at A, B,
of the sound heard by him changes by a factor f.
and C respectively.
The actual difference in the frequencies of the sound
heard by him before and after the engine crosses
A
him is
C O
1 1 1 f 2 
(A) n 0 (1  f 2 ) (B) 2 n 0  f 
2  
B
1– f  1 1– f 
(C) n 0   (D) n0  
(A) 1 > 2 > 3 (B) 1 = 2 > 3  1 f  2  1 f 
(C) 2 > 3 > 1 (D) 1 > 3 > 2
21. A sounding body of negligible dimension emitting a
18. The frequency changes by 10% as a sound source frequency of 150 Hz is dropped from a height.
approaches a stationary observer with constant speed During its fall under gravity it passes near a balloon
vs. What would be the percentage change in moving up with a constant velocity of 2m/s one
frequency as the source recedes the observer with second after it started to fall. The difference in the
the same speed. Given that vs < v. (v = speed of frequency observed by the man in balloon just
sound in air) before and just after crossing the body will be : (Given
(A) 14.3% (B) 20% that - velocity of sound = 300m/s ; g = 10 m/s2)
(C) 10.0% (D) 8.5% (A) 12 (B) 6
(C) 8 (D) 4
Section A - Equation of pressure wave, 7. Which of the following graphs is/are correct.
Velocity, Newton's and laplace
formula, Loudness and
sound in air)
sound in air)2
(Velocity of
(Velocity of
intensity, Energy in sound
(T=constat)
waves (A) Parabola (B)
Pressure
The figure represents the instantaneous picture of Temperature
a longitudinal harmonic wave travelling along the

negative x-axis. Identify the correct statement(s)
(Fundamental freq.
wave in a string)
of an organ pipe)
related to the movement of the points shown in the
(Velocity of
figure.
transverse
Parabola
(C) (D)
y v i Tension Length of organ pipe
a
b h j
g
o c x
d f k
Section B - Interference of waves,
e Reflection and refraction
1. The points moving in the direction of wave are Question No. 8 to 12 (5 questions)
(A) b (B) c A narrow tube is bent in the form of a circle of
(C) f (D) i radius R, as shown in the figure. Two small holes S
and D are made in the tube at the positions right
2. The points moving opposite to the direction of angle to each other. A source placed at S generated
propagation are a wave of intensity I0 which is equally divided into
(A) a (B) d two parts : One part travels along the longer path,
(C) f (D) j while the other travels along the shorter path. Both
the part waves meet at the point D where a detector
is placed
3. The stationary points are
(A) a (B) c
(C) g (D) k R
S
4. The points of maximum compression are
(A) c (B) g
D
(C) e (D) k
8. If a maxima is formed at the detector then, the
5. The points of maximum rarefaction are magnitude of wavelength  of the wave produced is
(A) a (B) e given by
(C) g (D) i R
(A) R (B)
2
6. The maximum displaced points are
(A) a (B) e R 2 R
(C) (D)
4 3
(C) g (D) i
SOUND WAVES 3.31
9. If the minima is formed at the detector then, the Section C - Standing waves (organ pipes),
magnitude of wavelength  of the wave produced is Resonance tube, Quink's tube,
given by Kundt's tube
3 R 13. The second overtone of an open organ pipe A and a

(A) 2R (B)
2 closed pipe B have the same frequency at a given
temperature. If follows that the ratio of the
2 R 2 R
(C) (D) (A) length of A and B is 4 : 3
3 5
(B) fundamental frequencies of A & B is 5 : 6
(C) lengths of B to that of A is 5 : 6
10. The maximum intensity produced at D is given by (D) frequencies of first overtone of A & B is 10 : 9
(A) 4I0 (B) 2I0
(C) I0 (D) 3I0 14. A gas is filled in an organ pipe and it is sounded with
an organ pipe in fundamental mode. Choose the
11. The maximum value of  to produce a maxima at D correct statement(s) : (T = constant)
is given by (A) If gas is changed from H2 to O2, the resonant
(A) R (B) 2R frequency will increase
(B) If gas is changed from O2 to N2, the resonant
R 3 R frequency will increase
(C) (D)
2 2
(C) If gas is changed from N2 to He, the resonant
frequency will decrease
12. The maximum value of  to produce a minima at D (D) If gas is changed from He to CH4, the resonant
is given by frequency will decrease
(A) R (B) 2R
R 3 R
(C) (D)
2 2
Section A - Equation of pressure wave,

Velocity, Newton's and laplace A 2.4m
D
formula, Loudness and intensity,
90°
Energy in sound waves
1m
1. A sound wave of frequency 100 Hz is travelling in
air. The speed of sound in air is 350 m/s. (a) By
how much is the phase changed at a given point in
2.5 ms? (b) What is the phase difference at a given B
instant between two points separated by a distance
of 10.0 cm along the direction of propagation?
6. Two identical loudspeakers are located at points A
& B, 2 m apart. The loudspeakers are driven by
2. The equation of a travelling sound wave is the same amplifier. A small detector is moved out
y = 6.0 sin (600 t – 1.8 x) where y is measured in from point B along a line perpendicular to the line
10-5 m, t in second and x in metre. (a) Find the ratio connecting A & B. Taking speed of sound in air as
of the displacement amplitude of the particles to 332 m/s. Find the frequency below which there will
the wavelength of the wave. (b) Find the ratio of
be no position along the line BC at which destructive
the velocity amplitude of the particles to the wave
interference occurs.
speed.
A
3. A man stands before a large wall at a distance of
2m
100.0 m and claps his hands at regular intervals. In
such way that echo of a clap merges with the next B
clap. If he has to clap 5 times during every 3
seconds, find the velocity of sound in air.
7. A source of sound S and a detector D are placed at
4. The loudness level at a distance R from a long linear some distance from one another. A big cardboard is
source of sound is found to be 40dB. At this point, placed near the detector and perpendicular to the line
the amplitude of oscillations of air molecules is 0.01 SD as shown in figure. It is gradually moved away
cm. Then find the loudness level & amplitude at a and it is found that the intensity changes from a
point located at a distance ‘10R’ from the source. maximum to a minimum as the board is moved through
a distance of 20 cm. Find the frequency of the sound
Section B - Interference of waves, emitted. Velocity of sound in air is 336 m/s.
5. Two point sound sources A and B each of power

S D
25 W and frequency 850 Hz are 1 m apart.
(a) Determine the phase difference between the
waves emitting from A and B received by detector
D as in figure. B 8. Sound of wavelength  passes through a Quincke’s
(b) Also determine the intensity of the resultant tube, which is adjusted to give a maximum intensity
sound wave as recorded by detector D . Velocity I0. Find the distance through the sliding tube should
of sound = 340 m/s. be moved to give an intensity I0/2.
SOUND WAVES 3.33
Section C - Standing waves (organ pipes), Section D - Beat's, Doppler's effect (Sound &
Resonance tube, Quink's tube, light)
Kundt's tube
13. Two stationary sources A and B are sounding notes
9. A closed organ pipe of length  = 100 cm is cut into of frequency 680 Hz. An observer moves from A to
two unequal pieces. The fundamental frequency of B with a constant velocity u. If the speed of sound
the new closed organ pipe piece is found to be same is 340 ms–1, what must be the value of u so that he
as the frequency of first overtone of the open organ hears 10 beats per second
pipe piece. Determine the length of the two pieces
and the fundamental tone of the open pipe piece.
14. A, B and C are three tuning forks. Frequency of A
Take velocity of sound = 320 m/s.
is 350 Hz. Beats produced by A and B are 5 per
second and by B and C are 4 per second. When a
10. The first overtone of a pipe closed at one end wax in put on A beat frequency between A and B is
resonates with the third harmonic of a string fixed at 2Hz and between A and C is 6Hz. Then, find the
its ends. The ratio of the speed of sound to the frequency of B and C respectively.
speed of transverse wave travelling on the string is
2 : 1. Find the ratio of the length of pipe to the
15. S, O & W represent source of sound (of frequency
length of string.
f), observer & wall respectively. V0, Vs, VD, V are
velocity of observer, source, wall & sound (in still
11. In a resonance-column experiment, a long tube, open air) respectively. VW is the velocity of wind. They
at the top, is clamped vertically. By a separate device, are moving as shown. Find
water level inside the tube can be moved up or down.
The section of the tube from the open end to the vw vD
water level act as a closed organ pipe. A vibrating V0
tuning fork is held above the open end, first and the vs
second resonances occur when the water level is
24.1 cm and 74.1 cm respectively below the open
(i) The wavelength of the waves coming towards
end. Find the diameter of the tube. [Hint: end
the observer from source.
correction is 0.3d]
(ii) The wavelength of the waves incident on the
wall.
12. An open organ pipe filled with air has a fundamental
(iii) The wavelength of the waves coming towards
frequency 500 Hz. The first harmonic of another
observer from the wall.
organ pipe closed at one end and filled with carbon
dioxide has the same frequency as that of the first (iv) Frequency of the waves (as detected by O)
harmonic of the open organ pipe. Calculate the length coming from wall after reflection.
of each pipe. Assume that the velocity of sound in
air and in carbondioxide to be 330 and 264 m/s
respectively.
Section A - Equation of pressure wave, Section B - Interference of waves,

Velocity, Newton's and laplace
formula, Loudness and intensity, 4. Two speakers are driven by the same oscillator with
Energy in sound waves frequency of 200 Hz. They are located 4 m apart
on a vertical pole. A man walks straight towards the
1. The displacement of the medium in a sound wave lower speaker in a direction perpendicular to the
is given by the equation ; y1 = A cos(ax + bt) where pole, as shown in figure.
A, a & b are positive constants. The wave is re-

flected by an obstacle situated at x = 0. The inten-
L d
sity of the reflected wave is 0.64 times that of the
incident wave.
(a) what are the wavelength & frequency of the

incident wave. (a) How many times will he hear a minimum in
sound intensity, and
(b) write the equation for the reflected wave.
(b) how far is he from the pole at these moments?
(c) in the resultant wave formed after reflection,
Take the speed of sound to be 330 m/s, and ignore
find the maximum & minimum values of the any sound reflections coming off the ground.
particle speeds in the medium.
5. A source emits sound waves of frequency 1000 Hz.
The source moves to the right with a speed of 32
2. Calculate the speed of sound in oxygen from
m/s relative to ground. On the right a reflecting sur-
the following data. The mass of 22.4 litre of face moves towards left with a speed of 64 m/s
oxygen at STP (T = 273 K and p= 1.0 x 105 N/m2) relative to the ground. The speed of sound in air is
is 32 g, the molar heat capacity of oxygen at 332 m/s. Find
constant volume is Cv = 2.5 R and that at constant (a) the wavelength of sound in air incident on re-
flecting surface
pressure is Cp = 3.5 R.
(b) the number of waves arriving per second which
meet the reflecting surface.
3. In a mixture of gases, the average number of (c) the speed of reflected waves.
degrees of freedom per molecule is 6. The rms (d) the wavelength of reflected waves.
speed of the molecules of the gas is c. Find the
velocity of sound in the gas. 6. Find the intensity of sound wave whose frequency
is 250 Hz. The displacement amplitude of particles
of the medium at this position is 1 × 10–8 m. The
density of the medium is 1 kg/m3, bulk modulus of
elasticity of the medium is 400 N/m2.
SOUND WAVES 3.35
Section C - Standing waves (organ pipes), Section D - Beat's, Doppler's effect (Sound &
Resonance tube, Quink's tube, light)
Kundt's tube
10. A train of length l is moving with a constant speed
7. (a) A standing wave in second overtone is v along a circular track of radius R, The engine of
maintained in a open organ pipe of length l. The the train emits a whistle of frequency f. Find the
distance between consecutive displacement node frequency heard by a guard at the rear end of the
and pressure node is ______________. train. Make suitable assumption.
(b) Two consecutive overtones produced by a
narrow air column closed at one end and open at 11. A bullet travels horizontally at 660 m/s at a height
the other are 750 Hz and 1050 Hz. Then the of 5 m from a man. How far is the bullet from the
fundamental frequency from the column is man when he hears its whistle? Velocity of sound
______________. in air = 340 m/s.
(c) A standing wave of frequency 1100 Hz in a
column of methane at 20°C produces nodes that
12. A supersonic jet plane moves parallel to the ground
are 20 cm apart. What is the ratio of the heat
at speed v = 0.75 mach (1 mach = speed of sound).
capacity at constant pressure to that at constant
The frequency of its engine sound is 0 = 2kHz and
volume.
the height of the jat plane is h = 1.5 km. At some
instant an observer on the ground hears a sound of
8. A tube 1.0 m long is closed at one end. A wire of frequency  = 20, Find the instant prior to the
–2
length 0.3 m and mass 1 × 10 kg is stretched instant of hearing when the sound wave received
between two fixed ends and is placed near the open by the observer was emitted by the jet plane.
end. When the wire is plucked at its mid point the Velocity of sound wave in the condition of observer
air column resonates in its 1st overtone. Find the = 340 m/s.
tension in the wire if it vibrates in its fundamental
mode.
[Vsound = 330 m/s]
9. Find the number of possible natural oscillations of

air column in a pipe whose frequencies lie below v0
= 1250 Hz. The length of the pipe is =85 cm. The
velocity of sound is v = 340 m/s.
Consider the two cases:
(a) the pipe is closed from one end
(b) the pipe is opened from both ends.
The open ends of the pipe are assumed to be the
antinodes of displacement.
1. An observer moves towards a stationary source of 5. While measuring the speed of sound by performing
sound, with a velocity one-fifth of the velocity of a resonance column experiment, a student gets the
sound. What is the percentage increase in the first resonance condition at a column length of 18
apparent frequency? [AIEEE 2005] cm during winter. Repeating the same experiment
during summer she measures the column length to
(A) zero (B) 0.5%
be x cm for the second resonance. Then
(C) 5% (D) 20%
[AIEEE 2008]
(A) 18 > x (B) x > 54

2. When two tuning forks (forks 1 and forks 2) are
(C) 54 > x > 36 (D) 36 > x > 18
sounded simultaneously, 4 beats per second are
heard. Now, some tape is attached on the prong of
the fork 2. When the tuning forks are sounded again, 6. The speed of sound in oxygen (O2) at a certain
6 beats per second are heard. If the frequency of temperature is 460 ms–1. The speed of sound in
fork is 200 Hz, then what was the original frequency helium (He) at the same temperature will be (assume
of fork 2? [AIEEE 2005] both gases to be ideal) [AIEEE 2008]
(A) 200 Hz (B) 202 Hz (A) 1420 ms–1 (B) 500 ms–1
(C) 196 Hz (D) 204 Hz (C) 650 ms–1 (D) 330 ms–1
3. A whistle producing sound waves of frequencies 7. Three sound waves of equal amplitudes have
9500 Hz and above is approaching a stationary frequencies (v - 1), v, (v + 1). They superpose to
person with speed v ms–1. The velocity of sound in give beat. The number of beats produced per second
air is 300 ms–1. If the person can hear frequencies will be [AIEEE 2009]
upto a maximum of 10,000 Hz, the maximum value
(A) 4 (B) 3
of v upto which he can hear the whistle is
(C) 2 (D) 1
[AIEEE 2006]
(A) 15 2 ms 1 (B) 15/ 2 ms 1

8. A motor cycle starts from rest & accelerates along a
(C) 15ms 1 (D) 30ms1 straight path at 2 ms–2. At the starting point of the
motor cycle there is a stationary electric sire. How
far has the motor cycle gone when the driver hears
4. A sound absorber attenuates the sound level by 20 the frequency of the siren at 94% of its value
db. The intensity decreases by a factor of when the motor cycle was at rest ? (speed of
[AIEEE 2007] sound = 330 ms–1) [AIEEE 2009]
(A) 1000 (B) 10000 (A) 49 m (B) 98 m

(C) 10 (D) 100 (C) 147 m (D) 196 m
SOUND WAVES 3.37
9. A cylindrical tube, open at both ends, has a 12. A train is moving on a straight track with speed
fundamental frequency, f, in air. The tube is dipped 20 ms–1. It is blowing its whistle at the frequency of
vertically in water so that half of it is in water. The 1000 Hz. The percentage change in the frequency
fundamental frequency of the air-column is now heard by a person standing near the track as the
train passes him is (speed of sound = 320 ms–1)
[AIEEE 2012]
close to : [JEE MAIN 2015]
f (A) 18% (B) 24%
(A) f (B)
2
(C) 6% (D) 12%
3f
(C) (D) 2f
4 13. A pipe open at both ends has a fundamental
frequency f in air. The pipe is dipped vertically in
water so that half of it is in water. The fundamental
10. A sonometer wire of length 1.5 m is made of steel. frequency of the air column is now:
The tension in it produces an elastic strain of 1%.
[JEE MAIN 2016]
What is the fundamental frequency of steel if density
and elasticity of steel are 7.7 × 10 3 kg/m3 and
3f
2.2×1011 N/m2 respectively? [JEE MAIN 2013] (A)
4
(B) 2f
(A) 200.5 Hz (B) 770 Hz

f
(C) f (D)
(C) 188.5 Hz (D) 178.2 Hz 2
14. An observer is moving with half the speed of light

11. A pipe of length 85 cm is closed from one end. Find towards a stationary microwave source emitting
the number of possible natural oscillations of air waves at frequency 10 GHz. What is the frequency
column in the pipe whose frequencies lie below 1250 of the microwave measured by the observer ?
Hz. The velocity of sound in air is 340 m/s. [JEE MAIN 2017]
(speed of light = 3×108 ms-1)
[JEE MAIN 2014]
(A) 15.3 GHz (B) 10.1 GHz
(A) 6 (B) 4 (C) 12.1 GHz (D) 17.3 GHz
(C) 12 (D) 8
1. In a resonance column method, resonance occurs at 6. The speed of sound of the whistle is :
two successive level of l1 = 30.7 cm and l2 = 63.2 (A) 340 m/s for passengers in A and 310 m/s for
cm using a tuning fork of f = 512 Hz. What is the passengers in B.
maximum error in measuring speed of sound using (B) 360 m/s for passengers in A and 310 m/s for
relations v = f  &  = 2(l2 – l1) [JEE-2005 (Sc)] passengers in B.
(A) 256 cm/sec (B) 92 cm/sec (C) 310 m/s for passengers in A and 360 m/s for
(C) 128 cm/sec (D) 102.4 cm/sec passengers in B.
(D) 340 m/s for passengers in both the trains.
2. A whistling train approaches a junction. An observer
standing at junction observers the frequency to be 7. The distribution of the sound intensity of the whistle
2.2 KHz and 1.8 KHz of the approaching and the as observed by the passengers in train A is best
receding train. Find the speed of the train (speed represented by :
sound = 300 m/s). [JEE-2005]
Intensity
Intensity
Passage (Q.3 to 5)
Two plane harmonic sound waves are expressed (A) (B)
by the equations.
y1 (x, t) = A cos (x – 100 t) f1 f2 Frequency f1 f2 Frequency
y2 (x, t) = A cos (0.46x – 92 t)
(All parameters are in MKS) [JEE 2006]
Intensity
Intensity
3. How many times does an obsever hear maximum
intensity in one second? (C) (D)
(A) 4 (B) 10 (C) 6 (D) 8 f1 f2 Frequency f1 f2 Frequency
4. What is the speed of the second?

(A) 200 m/s (B) 180 m/s 8. The spread of frequency as observed by the
(C) 192 m/s (D) 96 m/s passengers in train B is :
(A) 310 Hz (B) 330 Hz
5. At x = 0 how many times the amplitude of y1 + y2 is (C) 350 Hz (D) 290 Hz
zero in one second?
(A) 192 (B) 48 (C) 100 (D) 96
9. A vibrating string of certain length l under a tension
T resonates with a mode corresponding to the first
Passage (Q.6 to 8)
overtone (third harmonic) of an air column of length
Two trains A and B are moving with speeds 20 m/s 75 cm inside a tube closed at one end. The string
and 30 m/s respectively in the same direction on also generates 4 beats/s when excited along with a
the same straight track, with B ahead of A. The tuning fork of frequency n. Now when the tension
engines are at the front ends. The engine of train A of the string is slightly increased the number of beats
blows a long whistle. [JEE 2007] reduces to 2 per second. Assuming the velocity of
sound in air to be 340 m/s, the frequency n of the
tuning fork in Hz is : [JEE 2008]
Intensity
(A) 344 (B) 336

(C) 117.3 (D) 109.3
f1 f2 Frequency
10. A student performed the experiment to measure
Assume that the sound of the whistle is composed the speed of sound in air using resonance aircolumn
of components varying in frequency from f1 = 800 method. Two resonances in the aircolumn ware
Hz to f2 = 1120 Hz, as shown in the figure. The obtained by lowering the water level. The resonance
spread in the frequency (highest frequency–lowest with the shorter aircolumn is the first resonance
frequency) is thus 320 Hz. The speed of sound in
and that with the longer aircolumn is the second
air is 340 m/s.
resonance. Then, [JEE 2009]
SOUND WAVES 3.39
(A) the intensity of the sound heard at the first (C) Stretched wire clamped (R) f = L
resonance was more than that at the second at both ends
resonance
(B) the prongs of the tuning fork were kept in a
horizontal plane above the resonance tube O L
(C) the amplitude of vibration of the ends of the
(D) Stretched wire clamped at (S) f = 2L
prongs is typically around 1 cm
both ends and at mid point
(D) the length of the aircolumn at the first resonance
1
was somewhat shorter than the of the O L (T) f = 4L
4 L/2
wavelength of the sound in air
14. A police car with a siren of frequency 8 kHz is
11. A stationary source is emitting sound at a fixed
moving with uniform velocity 36 km/hr towards a
frequency f0, which is reflected by two cars
tall building which reflects the sound waves. The
approaching the source. The difference between
speed of sound in air is 320 m/s. The frequency of
the frequencies of sound reflected from the cars is
the siren heard by the car driver is [JEE 2011]
1.2 %of f0. What is the difference in the speeds of
(A) 8.50 kHz (B) 8.25 kHz
the cars (in km per hour) to the nearest integer ?
(C) 7.75 kHz (D) 7.50 kHz
The cars are moving at constant speeds much
smaller than the speed of sound which is 330 ms–1.
15. A person blows into open-end of a long pipe. As a
[JEE 2010]
result, a high-pressure pulse of air travels down the
12. A hollow pipe of length 0.8 m is closed at one end. pipe. When this pulse reaches the other end of the
At its open end a 0.5 m long uniform string is pipe,
vibrating in its second harmonic and it resonates (A) a high-pressure pulse starts travelling up the
with the fundamental frequency of the pipe. If the pipe, if the other end of the pipe is open.
tension in the wire is 50 N and the speed of sound (B) a low-pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe,
is 320 ms–1, the mass of the string is :[JEE 2010] if the other end of the pipe is open.
(A) 5 g (B) 10 g (C) a low-pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe,
(C) 20 g (D) 40 g if the other end of the pipe is closed.
(D) a high-pressure pulse starts travelling up the
pipe, if the other end of the pipe is closed.
13. Column I shows four systems, each of the same
[JEE 2012]
length L, for producing standing waves. The lowest
possible natural frquency of a system is called its 16. Two vehicles, each moving with speed u on the same
fundamental frequency, whose wavelength is horizontal straight road, are approaching each other.
denoted as f. Match each system with statement Wind blows along the road with velocity w. One of
given in column II describing the nature and these vehicles blows a whistle of frequency f1. An
wavelength of the standing waves. [JEE 2011] observer in the other vehicle hears the frequency
Column I Column II of the whistle of be f2. The speed of sound in still
(A) Pipe closed at one end (P) Longitudinal waves air is V. The correct statement (s) is (are) [JEE 2013]
(A) If the wind blows from the observer to the
source, f2 > f1.
O L (B) If the wind blows from the source to the
observer, f2 > f1.
(B) Pipe open at both ends (Q) Transverse waves
(C) If the wind blows from observer to the source,
f2 < f1.
(D) If the wind blows from the source to the
O L
observer, f2 < f1.
17. A sudent is perfarming an expernment using a (B) The plot below represents schematically the
resonance column and a tuning fork of frequency variation of beat frequency with time
244 s-1. He is told that the air in the tube has been
replaced by another gas (assume that the column
remains filled with the gas). If the minimum hight
at which resonance occurs is (0.350  0.005)m,
the gas in the tube is(useful information :
1/ 2
167RT  640J1/ 2 mole - 1/2 , 140RT  590J
mole-1/2. The molar masses M is garms are given in
10 (C) vP + vR = 2vQ
the options. Take the values of for each gas
M (D) The rate of change in beat frequency is
as given there.) [JEE Advanced 2014] maximum when the car passes through Q
[JEE Advanced 2016]
 10 7 
(A) Neon  M =20, 20 = 10 
  19. A block M hangs vertically at the bottom end of a
 10 3  uniform rope of constant mass per unit length. The
(B) Nitrogen  M  28,  
28 5  top end of the rope is attached to a fixed rigid support

at O. A transverse wave pulse (Pulse 1) of
 10 9  wavelength  0 is produced at point A (Pulse 2)
(C) Oxygen  M  32,  
32 16 
 without disturbing the position of M it takes time TAO
 10 17  to reach point O. Which of the following options
(D) Argon  M  36, 36  32  is/are correct? [JEE Advanced 2017]
 
(A) The velocities of the
18. Two loudspeakers M and N are located 20 m apart two pulses (Pulse 1 and
and emit sound at frequencies 118 Hz an 121 Hz, Pulse 2) are the same at
respectively. A car is initially at a point P, 1800 m the midpoint of rope
away from the midpoint Q of the line MN and moves (B) The velocities of any
towards Q constantly at 60 km/hr along the pulse along the rope is
perpendicular bisector of MN. It crosses Q and independent of its
eventually reaches a point R, 1800 m away from frequency and wavelength
Q, Let v(t) represent the beat frequency measured
(C) The wavelength of
by a person sitting in the car at time t. Let vP, vQ
Pulse 1 becomes longer
and vB be the beat frequencies measured at locations
when it reaches point A
P, Q and R, respectively. The speed of sound in air
is 330 ms-1. Which of the following statement(s) is (D) The time TAO = TOA
(are) true regarding the sound heard by the person?
20. A stationary source emits the sound of frequency
(A) The plot below represents schematically the
f0 = 492 Hz. The sound is reflected by a large car
variation of beat frequency with time
v(t) approaching thesourcewith aspeed of 2 ms–1. The
reflected signal is received by the source and
P superposed with the original. What will be the beat
frequency of the resulting signal in Hz? (Given that
Q the speed of sound in air is 330 ms–1 and the car
vQ
reflects the sound at the frequency it has received)
[JEE Advanced 2017]
R
t
SOUND WAVES 3.41
21. A person measures the depth of a well by measur- 23. In an experiment to measure the speed of sound by
ing the time intgerval between dropping a stone and a resonating air column, a tuning fork of frequency
receiving the sound of impact with the bottom of 500 Hz is used. The length of the air column is varied
the well. The error in his measurement of time is by changing the level of water in the resonance
T = 0.01 seconds and he measures the depth of tube. Two successive resonances are heard at air
the well to be L = 20 meters. Take the acceleration columns of length 50.7 cm and 83.9 cm. Which of
due to gravity g = 10 ms–2 and the velocityof sound the following statements is (are) true ?
is 300 ms–1. Then the fractional error in the mea- [JEE Advanced 2018]
surement, L/L, is closest to [JEE Advanced 2017] (A) The speed of sound determined from this
(A) 5% (B) 1% experiment is 332 ms-1
(C) 3% (D) 0.2% (B) The end correction in this experiment is 0.9 cm
(C) The wavelength of the sound wave is 66.4 cm
22. Two men are walking along a horizontal straight (D) The resonance at 50.7 cm corresponds to the
line in the same direction. The man in front walks fundamental harmonic
at a speed 1.0 ms–1 and the man behind walks at a
speed 2.0 ms–1. A third man is standing at a height
12m above the same horizontal line such that all
three men are in a vertical plane. The two walking
men are blowing identical whistles which emit a
sound of frequency 1430 Hz. The speed of sound
in air is 330 ms–1. At the instant, when the moving
men are 10 m apart, the stationary man is equidistant
from them. The frequency of beats in Hz, heard by
the stationary man at this instant, is __________.
[JEE Advanced 2018]
1. C 2. A 3. D 4. B 5. D
6. B 7. A 8. C 9. A 10. D
11. D 12. D 13. B 14. C 15. A
16. B 17. D 18. B 19. B 20. A
21. D 22. B 23. C 24. D 25. B
26. B 27. B 28. B 29. D 30. B
31. C 32. C 33. C 34. A 35. A
1. A 2. A 3. A 4. A 5. B
6. C 7. D 8. C 9. C 10. B
11. C 12. C 13. C 14. A 15. B
16. D 17. D 18. D 19. C 20. B
21. A
1. A,B 2. C 3. A 4. A,D 5. C
6. A,B,D 7. B,C 8. A,B,C 9. A,B,D 10. B
11. A 12. B 13. C,D 14. B,D
 2
1. (a) (b) 2. (a) 1.7 × 10–5 (b) 1.08 × 10–4
2 35
3. 333 m/s 4. 30 dB, 10 10 mm
5. (a) p (b) I  ( I A – IB ) 2  (25 / 312 ) 2 6. 83 Hz 7. 420 Hz
8. /8 9. 20, 80 cm, 200 Hz 10. 1:1 11. 3 cm

12. 33 cm and 13.2 cm 13. 2.5 ms–1 14. 345, 341 or 349 Hz
15. (i) (V – Vw + Vs) / f (ii) (V + Vw – Vs) / f (iii) (V–Vw–VD) / fr ; where fr=(V+Vw+VD/v + Vw – Vs) f
(iv) (V – Vw – Vo/V – Vw – VD) fr
SOUND WAVES 3.43
1. (a) 2 /a, b/2, (b) y2 = ± 0.8 A cos (ax – bt), (c) max. = 1.8 bA, min = 0,
2. 310 m/s 3. 2c/3 4. (a) 2; (b) 9.28 m and 1.99 m
 2  10 –9
5. (a) 0.3 m, (b) 1320, (c) 332 m/s, (d) 0.2 m 6. W/m2
4
7. (a) l/6 ; (b) 150 Hz; (c) 1.28 8. 735 N
v v
9. (a) vn = (2n + 1); six oscillations ; (b) vn= (n+1), also six oscillations ; Here n = 0, 1, 2, ...
4 2
10. f 11. 9.7 m 12. 5.9 sec
1. D 2. C 3. C 4. D 5. B
6. A 7. C 8. B 9. A 10. D
11. A 12. D 13. C 14. A
1. D 2. Vs = 30 m/s 3. A 4. A
5. C 6. B 7. A 8. A 9. A
10. A,C,D 11. 7 12. B
13. A  PT ; B  PS ; C  QS ; D  QR
14. A 15. B,D 16. A,B 17. D 18. A,C,D
19. BD 20. 6 21. B 22. 5.00 Hz 23. AC

Motion Physics Module 4

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Motion Physics Module 4

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

JEE Class Companion

Chapter 1 Simple Harmonic Motion

Chapter 3 Sound Wave

Acceleration 1.4 Waves 2.1

Section E - Equation of standing wave Section B - Interference of waves, Reflection

• Simple Harmonic Motion

Linear and angular simple harmonic motions.

• WAVES & SOUND WAVE

Simple Harmonic Motion

EXAMPLE 1 x=2 ;F=3 N

Describe the motion of a particle acted upon by a (away from M.P.)

EXAMPLE 3 Graph would be a half ellipse.

dv d time, t 0 T/4 T/2 3T/4 T

x T/4 T/2 3T/4 T 5T/4 3T/2

Sol. Comparing with equation x = A sin (t + ), we see

The maximum speed = A  = 5 m ×  s–1 = 5  m/s

10. S HM AS A P RO JECTIO N O F (4) Horizontal component of velocity of particle gives

In the above discussion the foot of projection is

point P on the circle which cuts it at point R & S

Step 2. Horizontal compoment of v(t) at R gives the direction 

– 3 (c) To reach the particle at mean position it will

EXAMPLE 9 When they meet angular displacement of P is

From above figure phase difference between both –A x A

11.2 Potential Energy (PE): 1 1

Step 2. Write down the mean position force relation. In

kx0 = mg ...(1) The string, the spring and

Sol. Let in equilibrium position of the block, extension in Case (a)

Now if we displace the block by x in the downward

The system is in equilibrium and at rest. Now mass

Now, if we remove m1. equillibrium position (E.P.)

v it is the extreme position.

m1u = (m1 + m2) v mg k

 kx0 = 2mg N.L. N.L of spring

Sol. The blocks will remain in contact till the blocks do k

m1m 2 Section D – Combination of springs

m1x 0 In series combination, tension is same in all the

2. Parallel combination : Case (b)

 F = – (k1x + k2x)  F = – (k1 + k2) x which gives

k1k 2 (c) What can be the maximum amplitude if the

Now m m(k1  k 2 ) Mm

(c) Maximum force of friction required for

Another method of finding time period of SHM is

Figure shows a system consisting of pulley having

Here I is moment of inertia of the body/particle about

Section F – Simple Pendulum

Time lost or gained in time t is given by

mg mg cos  I = MR2 + MR2 = 2MR2

the time period will be minimum when l

EXAMPLE 32 Section H – Combination of two or more SHM

= 2.5 × 10–4 kg-m2. (a) Having same Frequencies:

Import ant poin ts t o re member

A  A12  A 22  2A1A 2 cos(  / 3)

x1 = 5 sin (t + 30°) ; x2 = 10 cos (t) = A12  A 22  A1A2

amax = A 2 = 2 A12  A 22  A1A 2

(b) Having different frequencies

(ii) In two perpendicular directions

(3) If  = 90° & A1 = A2 = A

2. Linear SHM 3. Angular S.H.M

6. Mass-spring system Combination of springs : 7. Composition of 2 SHMs :

Exercise - 1 Objective Problems | JEE Main

4. A particle executes S.H.M. given by the equation y

(C) 0.15 3 ms–1 (D) 15 3 ms–1 y = 5 sin(t + 4) m

(C) TS remains same, TP decreases

Exercise - 2 (Leve-I) Objective Problems | JEE Main